Power System

Analysis
PEN-Drive / G-Drive Course / VOD & Tablet Users
Workbook

Electrical Engineering
Electrical & Electronics Engineering

GATE / ESE / PSUs

Santan Jha Sir

Power System Analysis
PEN-Drive / G-Drive Course / VOD & Tablet Users

Workbook
EE / EEE

Copyright © All Rights Reserved

GATE ACADEMY ®

No part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means,
electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise or stored in a database or retrieval
system without the prior written permission of the publishers. The program listings (if any) may be
entered, stored and executed in a computer system, but they may not be reproduced for
publication.

Printing of books passes through many stages - writing, composing, proof reading, printing etc. We
try our level best to make the book error- free. If any mistake has inadvertently crept in, we regret
it and would be deeply indebted to those who point it out. We do not take any legal responsibility.

Edition : PSA-HPD-5122

GATE ACADEMY ®

A/114-115, Smriti Nagar, Bhilai - 490 020 (C.G.)

Phone : 0788 - 4034176, 0788 - 3224176
Help Desk No. - +91-97131-13156
For Feedback & Suggestions...
info@gateacademy.co.in
 GATE Syllabus
Electrical Engineering (EE) : Power generation concepts, ac and dc transmission concepts, Models
and performance of transmission lines and cables, Series and shunt compensation, Electric field
distribution and insulators, Distribution systems, Per-unit quantities, Bus admittance matrix,
Gauss-Seidel and Newton-Raphson load flow methods, Voltage and Frequency control, Power
factor correction, Symmetrical components, Symmetrical and unsymmetrical fault analysis,
Principles of over-current, differential and distance protection; Circuit breakers, System stability
concepts, Equal area criterion.

ESE Syllabus
Electrical Engineering (EE) : Basic power generation concepts, steam, gas and water
turbines, transmission line models and performance, cable performance, insulation, corona
and radio interference, power factor correction, symmetrical components, fault analysis,
principles of protection systems, basics of solid state relays and digital protection; Circuit
breakers, Radial and ring-main distribution systems, Matrix representation of power
systems, load flow analysis, voltage control and economic operation, System stability
concepts, Swing curves and equal area criterion. HVDC transmission and FACTS concepts,
Concepts of power system dynamics, distributed generation, solar and wind power, smart
grid concepts, environmental implications, fundamentals of power economics.
 Table of Contents
Sr. Chapter Pages

1. Power System Basics ………………………..……..…….…..…..…. 1

2. Parameters of Transmission Lines …………..…….…..…..…. 5

3. Performance of Transmission Line ………………………….…. 16

4. Travelling Waves ……………………………………..…….…..…..…. 28

5. Voltage Control & Power Factor Improvement ……....…. 32

6. Distribution System…………………………………………………..…. 39

7. Cables & Insulators …...…………………………………..…..…..…. 44

8. Per Unit System Analysis ………………….……..…….…..…..…. 50

9. Symmetrical Faults ………………………………………………….…. 53

10. Symmetrical Components ………………………………..…....…. 64

11. Unsymmetrical Faults ……………………………..…….…..…..…. 73

12. Load Flow Studies ………………………….………………………..…. 84

13. Economic Load Dispatch ……………….....…………..…..…..…. 91

14. Power System Stability ………………….....…………..…..…..…. 98

15. Power System Protection………………….....…………..…..…..…. 110

16. Corona ………………………..……………….....…………..…..…..…. 117

 Video Lecture Information
Sr. Lecture Name Duration
Lecture 00 How to Study Power System Analysis ? 0:18:03
Chapter 01 Power System Basics
Lecture 01 Single Phase & 3 Phase System 0:39:29
Lecture 02 Star Connection 0:41:13
Lecture 03 Delta Connection 0:22:51
Lecture 04 Basics Of Inductor & Capacitor 0:31:06
Lecture 05 Power Flow Through Inductive & Capacitive Link 0:26:39
Lecture 06 Workbook Examples 2-5 0:44:10
Lecture 07 Workbook Examples 6 0:13:34
Chapter 02 Transmission Line Parameter
Lecture 01 Introduction To Transmission Lines 0:24:49
Lecture 02 Conductor Materials For Transmission Lines 0:52:01
Lecture 03 Resistance & Skin Effect 0:57:45
Lecture 04 Internal Inductance Of Transmission Line 0:44:30
Lecture 05 External Inductance Of Transmission Lines 0:55:43
Lecture 06 Interference Of Power Line With Communication Lines 1:00:58
Lecture 07 Mutual Inductance & Examples 0:21:31
Lecture 08 Inductance Of Bundled Conductor 1:00:18
Lecture 09 Inductance Of Double Circuit 3 Phase Line 0:24:22
Lecture 10 Workbook Problems 1-5 0:25:41
Lecture 11 Workbook Problems 6-10 0:16:50
Lecture 12 Basics Of Capacitance 0:24:06
Lecture 13 Capacitance Of 1 Phase & 3 Phase System 0:44:02
Lecture 14 Example On Capacitance 0:26:23
Lecture 15 Effect Of Earth On Capacitance 0:23:21
Lecture 16 Workbook Problems 11-22 0:41:08
Lecture 17 Workbook Problems 23-44 1:25:03
Chapter 03 Performance Of Transmision Lines
Lecture 01 Classification Of Transmission Line 0:32:28
Lecture 02 Short Transmission Line 0:59:14
Lecture 03 Voltage Regulation Of Short Transmission Lines 0:31:02
Lecture 04 Power Formula In Transmission Lines 1:02:16
Lecture 05 Some Examples On Power Flow 1:00:58
Lecture 06 Medium Transmission Lines 0:46:54
Lecture 07 Ferranti Effect (Continued) 0:18:47
Lecture 08 T Model & Pi Model Of MTL 0:56:15
Lecture 09 Pi Model (Continued) 0:17:11
Lecture 10 Long Transmission Lines 0:58:09
Lecture 11 Propagation Constant 0:17:34
Lecture 12 Tuned Line & Characteristic Impedance 0:46:26
Lecture 13 Equivalent ABCD Parameters & Losses Due To Charging Current 0:44:53
Lecture 14 Some Examples 0:28:02
Lecture 15 Problem Solution On Performance Of TL 01 0:53:19
Lecture 16 Problem Solution On Performance Of TL 02 0:22:34
Lecture 17 Workbook Examples 1-22 1:09:09
Lecture 18 Workbook Examples 23-24 0:17:38
Lecture 19 Workbook Examples 25-40 0:39:05
Lecture 20 Workbook Examples 51-55 0:16:51
Chapter 04 Performance Of Transmision Lines (Updated)
Lecture 01 Basics of Transmission Lines 0:40:02
Lecture 02 Short Transmission Lines 0:18:07
Lecture 03 Voltage Regulation 0:58:14
Lecture 04 Power Formula 0:29:33
Lecture 05 Power Transfer Equations 1:01:25
Chapter 05 Travelling Waves On Transmission Line
Lecture 01 Travelling Waves Basics 1:07:37
Lecture 02 Analysis Of Different Coefficients 0:20:04
Lecture 03 Surge Impedance Loading 0:33:42
Lecture 04 Ideal Power Transfer Capability 0:26:45
Lecture 05 Effect Of Compensation 0:48:06
Lecture 06 Workbook Problems 1-6 0:25:23
Chapter 06 Voltage Control & Power Factor Improvements
Lecture 01 Case Study On Power Factor Improvements 0:42:12
Lecture 02 Examples On PF Improvements 0:12:53
Lecture 03 Voltage Control Basics 0:39:27
Lecture 04 Compensation To Control Voltage 0:31:53
Lecture 05 Example On Voltage Control 0:22:57
Lecture 06 Synchronous Phase Modifier 0:17:55
Lecture 07 Practical Method To Control Voltage 0:19:18
Lecture 08 Concepts Through Questions 01 1:15:54
Lecture 09 Concepts Through Questions 02 0:34:33
Lecture 10 Workbook Examples 1-2 0:13:35
Lecture 11 Workbook Examples 3-12 0:53:51
Lecture 12 Workbook Examples 14 0:14:30
Chapter 07 Distribution System
Lecture 01 Basics Of Feeder & Distributor 0:27:13
Lecture 02 Types Of Distribution Systems 0:23:10
Lecture 03 DC Distributor With Concentrated Load Fed At One End 0:20:18
Lecture 04 DC Distributor Fed From Both Ends 0:09:16
Lecture 05 Workbook Example 9 0:11:54
Lecture 06 DC Distributor With Distributed Load 0:38:25
Lecture 07 Workbook Examples 1-5 0:21:04
Lecture 08 Workbook Example 10 0:17:55
Lecture 09 Workbook Examples 7,12 0:15:05
Lecture 10 AC Distribution With Workbook Example 0:18:45
Lecture 11 Workbook Examples 8 0:08:41
 Chapter 08 Cable and Insulators
Lecture 01 Types Of Overhead Line Insulators 0:35:48
Lecture 02 Voltage Distribution & String Efficiency 0:27:10
Lecture 03 Static Shielding 0:10:48
Lecture 04 Workbook Example 17 0:10:18
Lecture 05 Introduction & Insulation Resistance 0:22:51
Lecture 06 Insulation Capacitance Dielectric Loss 0:25:23
Lecture 07 Electric Field Stress 0:16:24
Lecture 08 Method To Reduce Leakage Current 0:10:27
Lecture 09 Workbook Examples 1-12 0:41:11
Chapter 09 Underground Cable (Updated)
Lecture 01 Underground Cable 0:27:43
Lecture 02 Characteristics of UG Cable 0:20:18
Lecture 03 Insulation Resistance 0:21:38
Lecture 04 Insulation Capacitance 0:29:50
Lecture 05 Dielectric Stress 0:15:22
Lecture 06 Electric Field Stress 0:23:36
Lecture 07 Capacitive Grading 0:35:53
Chapter 10 Per Unit Method
Lecture 01 Introduction Of Per Unit 0:35:37
Lecture 02 Per Unit Values On Single Phase System 0:36:55
Lecture 03 Representation Of Transformer In Per Unit 0:26:20
Lecture 04 Three Phase System In Per Unit 0:47:05
Lecture 05 Effect Of Changing Base Values On Per Unit 0:32:03
Lecture 06 Examples On Per Unit 01 0:14:28
Lecture 07 Examples On Per Unit 02 0:44:36
Lecture 08 Workbook Problem 1-10 0:40:30
Chapter 11 Symmetrical Fault
Lecture 01 Introduction To Fault 0:21:14
Lecture 02 Definition Of Short Circuit Fault 1:00:15
Lecture 03 Short Circuit Fault At No Load 0:49:46
Lecture 04 Reactor To Minimise Short Circuit Current 0:40:58
Lecture 05 Fault On Loaded Condition 0:37:52
Lecture 06 Short Circuit Transients On Transmission Lines 1:09:06
Lecture 07 Short Circuit Transients On Generator 0:20:31
Lecture 08 Subtransients Transients & Steady State Reactances 0:19:58
Lecture 09 Workbook Example 1 0:22:28
Lecture 10 Workbook Example 3-5 0:22:51
Lecture 11 Workbook Example 18 0:08:49
Lecture 12 Workbook Example 25,18,15,4 0:49:39
Chapter 12 Symmetrical Components
Lecture 01 Sequence Components 0:50:15
Lecture 02 Application Of Sequence Components With Examples 1:07:55
Lecture 03 Power In Sequence Components 0:27:57
Lecture 04 Sequence Impedance 0:16:35
Lecture 05 Per Phase Representation Of Load 0:29:02
Lecture 06 Sequence Network 0:30:48
Lecture 07 Example On Sequence Network 0:08:03
Lecture 08 Workbook Problems 1-9 0:54:56
Lecture 09 Workbook Problems 6-19 0:37:23
Chapter 13 Unsymmetrical Faults
Lecture 01 Introduction 0:20:39
Lecture 02 Line To Ground Fault 0:41:33
Lecture 03 LG Fault On Parallel Gen & LG Fault MVA 0:50:04
Lecture 04 Line To Line Fault 0:33:02
Lecture 05 Double Line To Ground Fault 0:30:22
Lecture 06 3 Phase Fault 0:12:40
Lecture 07 Severity Of Faults 0:23:49
Lecture 08 Workbook Problems 1-9 1:19:16
Chapter 14 Load Flow Analysis
Lecture 01 Admittance Matrix 1:01:15
Lecture 02 No Of Transmission Line Using Y Bus 1:04:11
Lecture 03 Impedance Matrix (Continued) 1:08:29
Lecture 04 Fault Analysis Using Z Bus 0:43:57
Lecture 05 Types Of Busses And Its Application 0:34:33
Lecture 06 Complex Power Equations 0:26:14
Lecture 07 Gauss Seidel Method 0:41:16
Lecture 08 Example On Gauss Seidal Method 0:33:43
Lecture 09 Basics Of Newton Raphson Method 0:37:16
Lecture 10 Newton Raphson Method And Size Of Jacobian 0:49:14
Lecture 11 Basics Of FDLF & Comparisions 0:15:39
Lecture 12 Workbook Example 2-10 0:28:23
Lecture 13 Workbook Example 09 & Its Analysis 0:17:22
Lecture 14 Workbook Examples 13-17 0:20:40
Chapter 15 Economic Load Dispatch
Lecture 01 Basic Of Economic Load Dispatch 0:40:21
Lecture 02 Economic Load Dispatch Without Considering Loss 0:23:35
Lecture 03 Example On Economic Load Dispatch Without Considering Loss 0:27:02
Lecture 04 Example On Economic Load Dispatch Without Considering Loss 0:27:48
Lecture 05 Economic Load Dispatch Considering Losses 0:32:20
Lecture 06 Significance Of Penalty Factor 0:08:52
Lecture 07 Example On ELD 0:44:15
Lecture 08 Load Curve 0:18:34
Lecture 09 Load Factor & Demand Factor 0:16:19
Lecture 10 Plant Utilisation Factor & Diversity Factor 0:07:14
Lecture 11 Plant Capacity Factor 0:12:40
Lecture 12 Workbook Problems 1-2 0:20:50
Lecture 13 Workbook Problems 4-6, 18-19 0:35:56
Chapter 16 Power System Stability
Lecture 01 Introduction 0:39:28
Lecture 02 Swing Equation 0:42:46
Lecture 03 Steady State Stability 0:42:45
Lecture 04 Steady State Stability Limit 0:22:24
Lecture 05 Inertia Constant & Frequency Of Rotor 0:40:26
Lecture 06 Transient Stability 0:58:53
Lecture 07 Application Of Equal Area Criteria 0:46:46
Lecture 08 Application Of EAC 0:36:45
Lecture 09 Application Of EAC 0:50:07
Lecture 10 Examples On EAC 0:35:21
Lecture 11 Swing Equation Of Motor 0:29:56
Lecture 12 Methods To Improve Transient Stability 0:29:22
Lecture 13 Static VAR Compensator 0:16:50
Lecture 14 Droop Characteristics 0:32:19
Lecture 15 Workbook Examples 1-3 0:35:12
Lecture 16 Workbook Examples 8,18,25 0:28:55
Lecture 17 Workbook Examples 52-53 0:38:35
Chapter 17 Power System Protection
Lecture 01 Introduction To Switchgear & Protection 0:10:22
Lecture 02 Characteristics Of Switchgear & Protection 0:10:07
Lecture 03 Overcurrent Protection PSM & TMS 0:37:05
Lecture 04 Types Of Overcurrent Relay 0:19:19
Lecture 05 Directional Overcurrent Relay 0:11:04
Lecture 06 Distance Relay Impedance Relay 0:19:01
Lecture 07 Reactance Relay 0:10:57
Lecture 08 Mho Relay 0:22:41
Lecture 09 Uses Of Distance Relay 0:14:07
Lecture 10 Differential Relay 0:21:00
Lecture 11 Examples On Differential Relay 0:22:20
Lecture 12 Earth Fault Protection 0:16:09
Lecture 13 Merz Price Protection 0:22:51
Lecture 14 Arc Interruption Method In Circuit Breaker 0:22:51
Lecture 15 Recovery Voltage & Active Recovery Voltage 0:26:41
Lecture 16 Restriking Voltage & Resistance Switching 0:45:49
Lecture 17 Circuit Breaker Rating & Uses 0:22:40
Lecture 18 Workbook Problems 1-10 0:30:16
Chapter 18 Corona
Lecture 01 Corona 0:34:57
Lecture 02 Examples on Corona 0:11:55
Chapter 19 Problems Solving
Lecture 01 Problem Solving 1-5 0:59:20
Lecture 02 Problem Solving 6-11 0:47:42
Lecture 03 Problem Solving 11-15 1:13:46
Lecture 04 Problem Solving 16-23 0:59:36
Lecture 05 Problem Solving 33-36 0:35:49
Lecture 06 Problem Solving 37-50 0:28:58
 1 Power System Basics
(3 - φ and Basics of L and C)

Objective & Numerical Ans Type Questions : phase-a of the supply voltage is V cos(ωt )
Q.1 Using Thevenin’s equivalent circuit, and the phase-a of the load current is
determine the rms value of the voltage (in I cos(ωt − φ) , the instantaneous three phase
volts) across the 100 Ω resistor after the power is [GATE 2001, IIT Kanpur]
switch is closed in the 3-phase as shown in (A) a constant with a magnitude of VI cos φ .
figure. [GATE 1992, IIT Delhi] (B) a constant with a magnitude of (3/2)
P
VI cos φ .
R 300 W 100 W
(C) time varying with an average value of
(3/2) VI cos φ and a frequency of
300 W 300 W
100 Hz .
B Y
(D) time varying with an average value of
VI cos φ and a frequency of 50 Hz.
400 V, 3-phase balanced source Q.4 For the three-phase circuit shown in the
Q.2 A set of three equal resistors, each of value figure the ratio of the currents I R : IY : I B is
Rx , connected in star across RYB of given given by [GATE 2005, IIT Bombay]
figure consumes the same power as the IR
unbalanced delta connected load shown. The R

value of Rx is _____ Ω.
R1
[GATE 1994, IIT Kharagpur]
R B
IB
j 50 R1
400 V, 3- f 100

- j 50
Y
Y IY
B
(A) 1:1: 3 (B) 1:1: 2
Q.3 A 50 Hz balanced three phase, Y-connected
supply is connected to a balanced three 3
(C) 1:1: 0 (D) 1: 1:
phase Y-connected load. If the instantaneous 2
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 2 GATE ACADEMY®

Q.5 The line A to neutral voltage is 10∠150 V for Practice (objective & Num Ans) Questions :
a balanced three-phase star-connected load
Q.1 The two-phase balanced AC generator of
with phase sequence ABC. The voltage of
figure feeds two identical loads. The two
line B with respect to line C is given by
voltage sources are 180 0 out of phase. Find
[GATE 2014, IIT Kharagpur]
(i) the line currents, voltages and their
(A) 10 3∠1050 V (B) 10∠1050 V
phase angles and
(C) 10 3∠ − 750 V (D) −10 3∠900 V (ii) the average powers delivered by the
Q.6 In the balanced 3-phase, 50 Hz, circuit generator.
shown below, the value of inductance (L) is a
IA
A
10 mH. The value of the capacitance (C) for
which all the line currents are zero, in +
Va = V p ∠00 Z = Z ∠θ
millifarads, is ______. −
[GATE 2016, IISc Bangalore] n N

IN
−
C Vb = V p ∠1800 Z = Z ∠θ
L L
+
b B
C C
IB
L Generator Load
Q.2 Solve problem 1, given Vp = 110 Vrms and
Q.7 A three-phase load is connected to a three-
Z = 4 + j3 Ω .
phase balanced supply as shown in the
figure. Q.3 Show that the line-to-line voltage VL in a
a
three phase system is 3 times the line-to-
R
neutral voltage VPh .
n j10
- j10 Q.4 A three-phase, ABC system with an
c effective voltage 70.7 V has a balanced Δ −
b connected load with impedances 20∠ 450 Ω
If Van = 100∠ 0 0 V, Vbn = 100∠ − 120 0 V and . Obtain the line currents.
Vcn = 100 ∠ − 240 0 V (angles are considered
Q.5 A three-phase three-wire CBA system, with
an effective line voltage of 106.1 V, has a
positive in the anti-clockwise direction), the
balanced Y-connected load with impedances
value of R for zero current in the neutral
5∠ − 300 Ω . Obtain the currents.
wire is _________Ω (up to 2 decimal
A
places). [GATE 2018, IIT Guwahati]
Q.8 The line current of a three-phase four wire IA
VAN 5Ð - 300 W
system are square waves with amplitude of
100 A. These three currents are phase N O
shifted by 1200 with respect to each other. VBN IB 5Ð - 300 W
The rms value of neutral current is 5Ð - 300 W
B
[GATE 2019, IIT Madras]
(A) 0 A (B) 100 A VCN IC
100
(C) A (D) 300 A
3 C
GATE ACADEMY® 3 Power System Basics
Q.6 A three-phase, three-wire CBA system, with Q.5 A three-phase four wire, ABC system with
an effective line voltage 106.1 V, has a line voltage VBC = 294.2∠00 V , has Y-
balanced Δ − connected load with
0
impedances Z = 15∠30 Ω . Obtain the line connected load of Z A = 10∠00 Ω,
and phase currents by the single-line Z B = 15∠300 Ω and ZC = 10∠ − 300 Ω
equivalent method.
(figure). Obtain the neutral currents.
Q.7 Two lamps of equal resistance are connected A
across the lines R and B of a symmetrical 3-
phase system. The junction of the two lamps IA 10Ð00 W
VAN IN
is connected to the neutral N of the system
through a capacitor of reactance numerically N
equal to the resistance of the lamp. Show VBN IB 10Ð - 300 W
that the lamp connected to the leading phase 15Ð300 W
takes 59.7 % more current than the other. B

VCN IC
Assignment Questions :

Q.1 A three-phase, three-wire system, with an C

effective line voltage 176.8 V, supplies two Q.6 The Y-connected load impedances
balanced loads one in delta with
Z A = 10∠0 Ω, Z = 15∠300 Ω
0
and
Z Δ = 15∠00 Ω and the other in wye with
ZY = 10∠300 Ω . Obtain total power. ZC = 10∠ − 300 Ω in figure, are supplied by
a three-phase, three-wire, ABC system in
Q.2 Obtain the readings when the two-wattmeter
method is applied to the circuit of solved which VBC = 208∠00 ΩV . Obtain the
problem 8. voltages across the impedances and the
The angle on I L , − 9.99 is the negative of displacement neutral voltage VON .
the angle on the equivalent impedance of the Q.7 Obtain the total average power for the
parallel combination of 5∠00 Ω and unbalanced, Y-connected load in solved
10∠300 Ω . Therefore θ = 9.90 in the problem 13 and compare with the readings
formulas of section 13. of wattmeters in lines B and C.
Q.8 A three-phase, three-wire, balanced, Δ −
W1 = VL eff I L eff cos(θ + 300 ) connected load yields wattmeter readings of
= (176.8) (29.7) cos 39.90 = 4028 W 1154 W and 557 W. Obtain the load
impedance, if the line voltage is 141.4 V.
W2 = VL eff I L eff cos (θ − 300 )
Q.9 A balanced Δ − connected load, with
= (176.8) (29.7) cos(−20.10 ) = 4931 W Z Δ = 30∠300 Ω is connected to a three-
As a check W1 + W2 = 8959 W , in agreement phase, three-wire 250 V system by
with Problem 8. conductors having impedances
Q.3 A three-phase supply, with an effective line ZC = 0.4 + j 0.3 Ω . Obtain the line-to-line
voltage 240 V, has an unbalanced Δ − voltage at the load.
connected to shown in figure. Obtain the Q.10 A voltmeter with a resistance of 10000 Ω is
line currents and the total power. connected across a three phase supply, with
Q.4 Obtain the readings of wattemeters placed in two other 10000 Ω resistors. Find the
line A and B of the circuit of solved problem reading on the voltmeter (a) in the
10 (Line C is the potential reference for both
conditions shown in figure, (b) when the
meters).
voltmeter is shunted by 5000 Ω resistor.
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 4 GATE ACADEMY®
Q.11 A symmetrical 3-phase, 440 V system
supplies a star-connected load,
0
Z R = 10∠30 Ω , ZY = 12∠450 ,
Z B = 15∠400 Ω . Assuming the neutral of
the supply in earthed, calculate the voltage
of star point to earth, Sequence is RYB.

Answer Keys

Objective & Numerical Answer Type Questions

1. 115.47 2. 100 3. B 4. A 5. C
6. 3.04 7. 5.77 8. B
Practice Questions

(i) VAN = VP ∠ 00 I A = IP∠ − θ

VBN = VP ∠ − 1800 I B = I P ∠ − 1800 − θ
1.
VAB = 2VP ∠00
(ii) Pavg = 2VP I P cos θ

V AN = 110∠ 00 , VBN = 110∠ − 1800 , V AB = 220∠ 00

2.
I A = 22∠ − 36.90 , I B = 22∠ − 216.90 , Pavg = 3872 Watts

3. Conventional Question

4. I AB = 5.0∠ 750 , I BC = 5.0∠ − 450 , I CA = 5.0∠1950

5. I A = 17.32∠ 600 , I B = 17.32∠ 600 , I C = 17.32∠1800

6. I L = 23.1 A, I AB = 13.3∠ 2100 , I BC = 13.3∠ − 300 , I CA = 13.3∠ 2100

7. Conventional Question


 2 Parameters of
Transmission Lines
Objective & Numerical Ans Type Questions : Q.6 For a single phase overhead line having solid
copper conductors of diameter 1 cm, spaced 60 cm
Q.1 The increase in resistance due to non-uniform
between centers, the inductance in mH/km is
distribution of current in a conductor is known as
_______ effect. [GATE 1994-Kharagpur] [GATE 1999-Bombay]

Q.2 A 100 km long transmission line is loaded at 110 (A) 0.05 + 0.2ln 60 (B) 0.2ln 60
kV. If the loss of line is 15 MW and the load is 150 (C) 0.05 + 0.2ln(60 / 0.5) (D) 0.2ln(60 / 0.5)
MVA, the resistance of the line is [IES 2003]
Q.7 The component inductance due to the internal flux
(A) 8.06 Ω /phase (B) 0.806 Ω /phase linkage of a non-magnetic straight solid circular
(C) 0.0806 Ω /phase (D) 80.6 Ω /phase conductor per meter length, has a constant value,
and is independent of the conductor diameter,
Q.3 Hollow conductors are used in transmission lines
because [IES 2003]
to [IES 1997]
(A) all the internal flux due to current remains
(A) reduce weight of copper
concentrated on the peripheral region of the
(B) improve stability conductor
(C) reduce corona (B) the internal magnetic flux density along the
(D) increase power transmission capacity radial distance from the centre of the
conductor increases proportionately to the
Q.4 When is the effective resistance due to skin effect
current enclosed
equal to that of ohmic resistance, when
(C) the entire current is assumed to flow along the
(A) the current is uniformly distributed
conductor axis and the internal flux is
(B) the frequency is high distributed uniformly and concentrically
(C) the frequency is low (D) the current in the conductor is assumed to be
(D) the current is non uniformly distributed uniformly distributed throughout the
conductor cross section
Q.5 The per phase line loss in a 40 km long
transmission line is not to exceed 60 kW while it is Q.8 The inductance per unit length of an overhead line
delivering 100 A per phase. If the resistivity of the due to internal flux linkages
−8
conductor material is 1.72 × 10 Ω - m , the required (A) depends on the size of the conductor
conductor diameter is _____ cm.
(B) is independent of the size of conductor and
constant
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 6 GATE ACADEMY®
(C) depends on the current through the conductor Q.14 The conductors of a 10 km long, single phase, two

(D) depends on distance between conductors wire line are separated by a distance of 1.5 m. The
diameter of each conductor is 1 cm. If the
Q.9 The self inductance of a long cylindrical conductor
conductors are of copper, the inductance of the
due to its internal flux linkages is K H/m. If the
circuit is [GATE 2001-Kanpur]
diameter of the conductor is doubled, then the self
(A) 50.0 mH (B) 45.3 mH
inductance of the conductor due to its internal flux
(C) 23.8 mH (D) 19.6 mH
linkages would be
Q.15 The inductance of a power transmission line
(A) 0.5 K H/m (B) K H/m
increases with [GATE 1992-Delhi]
(C) 1.414 K H/m (D) 4 K H/m (A) decrease in line length
Q.10 The inductance of a single phase transmission line (B) increase in diameter of conductor
is 1.2 mH/phase/km. If the spacing of conductors (C) increase in spacing between the phase
and the radius of the conductors are doubled, the conductors
inductance of the line will be (D) increase in load current carried by the
(A) 4.8 mH/phase/km conductors.

(B) 1.2 mH/phase/km Q.16 The inductance of single-phase two-wire power

transmission line per kilometer gets doubled when
(C) (ln 2) x 1.2 mH/phase/km
the [IES 1993]
(D) (ln 4) x 1.2 mH/phase/km (A) Distance between the wires is doubled
Q.11 A stranded conductor having a radius of 1 cm and (B) Distance between the wires is increased four
hollow conductor also of radius 1 cm. Find the fold
inductance in both case at a distance of 2.5 m from (C) Distance between the wires is increased as
stranded and hollow conductor in micro henry. square of original distance
(A) 0.5, 0.5 (B) 0.5, 1.1 (D) Radius of the wire is doubled

(C) 1.15, 1.1 (D) 1.15, 0.5 Q.17 A single phase, two wire transmission line, 15 km
long is made up of round conductors, each 0.8 cm
Q.12 A transmission line having a diameter of 2 cm in diameter, separated from each other by 40 cm.
and μ r = 5 produces an internal inductance 0.06 The value of inductance is _____ mH.
μH/m . If it is replaced by an ACSR conductor Q.18 A single phase, 10 km, two wire transmission line
which has μr = 8 with the same size then the has 16.65 mH total inductance. If the distance
internal inductance will be _____ μH/m . between the conductors is 1 m, the conductor
diameter is _____ cm.
Q.13 Consider a long, two-wire line composed of solid
Q.19 An overhead line 50 kms in length is to be
round conductors. The radius of both conductors
constructed of conductors 2.56 cm in diameter, for
is 0.25 cm and the distance between their centers is
50 Hz single phase transmission. The line
1 m. If this distance is doubled, then the
reactance must not exceed 31.4 Ω . The maximum
inductance per unit length
permissible spacing is _____ m.
(A) doubles [GATE 2002-Bangalore] Q.20 Two long parallel conductors carry currents of + I
(B) halves and − I . Determine the magnetic field intensity at
point P.
(C) increases but does not double a b
P
(D) decreases but does not halve +I -I
2d d
GATE ACADEMY® 7 Parameters of Transmission Line
I −I at a center-to-center distance of 1 m in a horizontal
(A) AT/m (B) AT/m
6πd 6πd plane. This is now converted to a three-phase
I −I transmission line by introducing a third conductor
(C) AT/m (D) AT/m
3πd 3πd of the same radius. This conductor is fixed at an
Q.21 The conductor of a single phase, 60 Hz two wire equal distance D from the two single phase
line is a solid round aluminum wire having a conductors. The three phase line is fully
diameter of 0.412 cm. The conductor spacing is 3 transposed. The positive sequence inductance per
m. Assume negligible skin effect. Determine phase of three phase system is to be 5% more than
that of the inductance per conductor of the single-
(1) the total inductance of line in mH/mile.
phase system. The distance D, in meters, is _____.
(2) the inductance due to internal flux linkages in
mH/mile. [GATE 2016-Bangalore]
Q.26 For equilateral spacing of conductors of an
Q.22 A two conductor, single phase line operates at 50
untransposed 3 − φ line, we have
Hz. The diameter of each conductor is 60 mm and
the spacing between the conductors is 5 m. [GATE 1996-Bangalore]

(1) the loop inductance of the line. (A) balanced receiving end voltage and no
communication interference
(2) the inductive reactance.
(B) unbalanced receiving end voltage and no
(3) the loop inductance of line when the
communication interference
conductor material is steel of μ = 50 .
(C) balanced receiving end voltage and
Q.23 Consider an overhead transmission line with 3-
communication interference
phase, 50 Hz balanced system with conductors
(D) unbalanced receiving end voltage and
located at the vertices of an equilateral triangle of
communication interference
length Dab = Dbc = Dca = 1 m as shown in figure
Q.27 Statement (I) : The expression for the value of
below. The resistances of the conductors are
inductance L per conductor of an un-
neglected. The geometric mean radius (GMR) of
symmetrically spaced 3-phase overhead
each conductor is 0.01 m. Neglecting the effect of
transmission line contains an imaginary term.
ground, the magnitude of positive sequence
Statement (II) : The presence of the imaginary
reactance in Ω/km (rounded off to three decimal
term is due to the mutual inductance between the
places) is _____ [GATE 2017-Roorkee]
phase conductors and can be eliminated by
c
symmetrically transposing the three line-
conductors along the length of the line.
Dca Dbc Codes : [IES 2015]
(A) Statement (I) and Statement (II) are
a Dab b individually true and Statement (II) is the
correct explanation of Statement (I)
Q.24 A three phase transmission line has its conductors
at the corners of an equilateral triangle with side 3 (B) Statement (I) and Statement (II) are

m. The diameter of each conductor is 1.63 cm. The individually true but Statement (II) is not the

inductance of the line per phase per km is correct explanation of Statement (I)
(C) Statement (I) is true but Statement (II) is false
[IES 2002]
(D) Statement (I) is false but Statement (II) is true
(A) 1.232 mH (B) 1.182 mH
Q.28 Power transmission lines are transposed to reduce
(C) 1.093 mH (D) 1.043 mH
(A) Skin effect [IES 2012]
Q.25 A single phase transmission line has two
(B) Ferranti effect
conductors each of 10 mm radius. These are fixed
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 8 GATE ACADEMY®
(C) Transmission loss Q.35 A single phase transmission line and a telephone
(D) Interference with neighboring communication line are both symmetrically strung one below the
lines. other, in horizontal configurations, on a common
Q.29 Transmission lines are transposed to [IES 1996] tower. The shortest and longest distances between
the phase and telephone conductors are 2.5 m and
(A) reduce copper loss
3 m respectively. The voltage (volt/km) induced in
(B) reduce skin effect
the telephone circuit, due to 50 Hz current of 100
(C) prevent interface with neighboring telephone
amps in the power circuit is
line
[GATE 2006-Kharagpur]
(D) prevent short circuit between any two line
(A) 4.81 (B) 3.56
Q.30 A three-phase 60 Hz line has flat horizontal (C) 2.29 (D) 1.27
spacing. The conductors have a GMR of 0.0133 m
Q.36 The inductive interference between power and
with 10 m between adjacent conductors. The value
communication lines can be minimized by
of inductive reactance per phase in ohms per
(A) transposition of communication lines
kilometer is _____.
(B) transposition of power lines
Q.31 The inductance of a 3 − φ line operating at 50 Hz
(C) increasing distance between the conductors
as shown in below figure and conductor diameter
(D) transposition of power lines or increasing the
0.8 cm is _____ mH/km.
distance between the conductors
Statement For Linked Questions 37 & 38
m
1.

6 A single phase 60 Hz overhead power line is

6

1.
m

symmetrically supported on a horizontal cross

arm. A telephone line is also symmetrically
3.2 m
supported on a horizontal cross arm 1.8 m directly
Q.32 A three phase 50 Hz line consists of three
below the power line.
conductors each of diameter 21 mm. The spacing
2.5 m
between the conductors is as follows : a b
A − B = 3 m, B − C = 5 m, C − A = 3.6 m
1.8 m
The inductive reactance per phase per km of the c d
line is _____ Ω . 1m
Q.33 A 3−φ line is designed with equilateral spacing of Q.37 Calculate the mutual inductance between the
16 ft. It is decided to build the line with horizontal power line and the telephone line.
spacing D13 = 2 D12 = 2 D23 . The conductors are (A) 2 ×10−7 H/m (B) 1.5 ×10−7 H/m
transposed. The spacing between adjacent (C) 1×10−7 H/m (D) 0.5 ×10−7 H/m
conductors in order to obtain the same inductance
Q.38 Find the 60 Hz voltage per km induced in the
as in the original design should be _____ ft.
telephone line when the power line carries 150 A.
Q.34 Inductance of transmission line for a length of 400
(A) 4.65 V/km (B) 5.65 V/km
km in unsymmetrical configuration are :
(C) 6.65 V/km (D) 7.65 V/km
LR = 30 mH, LY = 20 mH, LB = 25 mH
Q.39 If the power line and telephone line are in the
What will be the inductance of each tansmission same horizontal plane, when 150 A flows in the
line after transposing? power line, the 60 Hz voltage per km induced in
(A) LR = LY = LB = 30 mH the telephone line is _____ V.
(B) LR = LY = LB = 20 mH P1 P2 T1 T2
(C) LR = LY = LB = 25 mH 2.5 m 18 m 1m
(D) LR = LY = LB = 75 mH
GATE ACADEMY® 9 Parameters of Transmission Line
Q.40 A single phase 50 Hz power line is supported on a Q.45 One circuit of a single phase transmission line is
horizontal cross arm. The spacing between composed of three solid 0.25 cm radius wires. The
conductors is 2.5 m. A telephone line is also return circuit is composed of three 0.5 cm radius
supported on a horizontal cross arm in the same wires. The inductance per unit length of single
horizontal plane as the power line. The conductors phase line is _____ mH/km.
of the telephone line are of solid copper spaced 0.6 9m
m between centres. The distance between the a d
nearest conductors of the two lines is 20 m. The
voltage induced in the telephone line for 150 A 6m
current flowing over the power line is _____ V/km. b e
Q.41 A 50 Hz single phase transmission line and a
telephone line are parallel to each other. The 6m
c f
mutual inductance in mH/km is _____.
P1 5m P2 side x side y
Q.46 Two conductors X and Y are made of filaments of
3m radii 3 cm and 4 cm. The loop inductance of the
line if it is 100 m long is ____ mH.
0.5 m 1.5 m 2m 0.3 m
T1 T2
2m
a b c d e
Statement For Linked Questions 42 & 43
A telephone line runs parallel to an untransposed
side x side y
three phase transmission line. The power line
Q.47 A nuclear power station of 500 MW capacity is
carries balanced current of 400 A per phase.
located at 300 km away from a load center. Select
a b c t1 t2 the most suitable power evacuation transmission
5m 5m 15 m 1m configuration among the following options
Q.42 The mutual inductance between the circuits is [GATE 2011-Madras]
(A) 4.4 μH/km (B) 5.4 μH/km (A) Load center

(C) 6.4 μH/km (D) 7.4 μH/km 132 kV, 300 km double circuit
(B) Load center
Q.43 The 50 Hz voltage induced in the telephone line is
132 kV, 300 km single circuit with
(A) 0.33 V/km (B) 0.44 V/km 40% series capacitor compensation
(C) 0.55 V/km (D) 0.65 V/km
(C) Load center
Q.44 A multi-conductor single-phase line has three
400 kV, 300 km single circuit
conductors a, b and c each of radius 0.2 cm for lead
(D) Load center
and two conductors d and e of radius 0.4 cm for
400 kV, 300 km double circuit
return circuit as shown in figure. The total
Q.48 In a single phase line as shown in figure,
inductance of the line is _____ mH/km.
conductors a and a’ in parallel form one conductor
6m
a d while conductors b and b’ in parallel form the

4m return path. Conductor diameter is 2 cm.

Assuming that current is equally shared by the
b e
two parallel conductors the total inductance of the
4m
line in mH per km is _____.
c a a’ b b’
Side A Side B
20 cm 100 cm 20 cm
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 10 GATE ACADEMY®
Q.49 A single phase double circuit transmission line is Q.4 A three phase overhead transmission line has its
shown in below figure. Conductors 1 and 2 in conductors horizontally spaced with spacing
parallel form one path while conductors 1’ and 2’ between adjacent conductors equal to d. If now the
in parallel the return path. The current is equally conductors of the line are rearranged to form an
shared by the two parallel lines. Diameter of each equilateral triangle of sides equal to d then
conductor is 2 cm. The total inductance in mH per [GATE 1993-Bombay, IES 2003]
km of the line is _____. (A) average capacitance and inductance will
1 1’ increase
(B) average capacitance will decrease and
1m
inductance will increase
2 2’ (C) average capacitance will increase and
3m inductance will decrease
Q.50 A three-phase circuit line consist of 7 / 4.75 mm (D) surge impedance loading of the line increase
hard drawn copper conductors. The arrangement Q.5 A three phase transmission line conductors were
of the conductors is shown in figure. The line is arrange in horizontal spacing with d as the
completely transposed. The inductive reactance distance between adjacent conductors. If these
per phase per km of the 50 Hz system is _____ Ω . conductors are rearranged to form an equilateral
6m triangle with sides equal to d then the [IES 2007]
a c’
(A) Cn1 = Cn 2 & L1 > L2 (B) Cn1 > Cn 2 & L1 < L2
3m (C) Cn1 < Cn 2 & L1 > L2 (D) Cn1 > Cn 2 & L1 = L2
9m
b b’ Q.6 If the separation between the three phases of a
3m transmission line is increased then
(A) The inductance will increase and capacitance
c a’
will remain unchanged
Practice (objective & Num Ans) Questions : (B) Both the inductance and capacitance will
increase
Q.1 The inductance in mH per km per phase of double
(C) The inductance will increase and the
circuit three phase line is _____, if the radius of
capacitance will decrease
each conductor is 15 mm.
(D) The inductance will decrease and the
a b c a’ b’ c’
capacitance will increase
1.75 m 1.75 m 1.75 m 1.75 m 1.75 m
Q.7 A 33 kV, 50 Hz, 115 km long three-phase
Q.2 The horizontally placed conductors of a single transmission line has three conductors with equal
phase line operating at 50 Hz are having outside radius of 1.5 cm each. The conductors are
diameter of 1.6 cm, and the spacing between arranged at the corner of an equilateral triangle
centers of the conductors is 6 m. The permittivity with a separation distance of 2 m. The value of
of free space is 8.854 ×10−12 F/m. The capacitance to charging current is _____ A.
ground per kilometer of each line is Q.8 A single circuit 3 − φ , 60 Hz transmission line
[GATE 2014-Kharagpur] consists of three conductors each of radius 10 cm
(A) 4.2 × 10 − 9 F (B) 8.4 × 10 − 9 F arranged as shown. The neutral capacitance per
− 12 − 12
(C) 4.2 × 10 F (D) 8.4 × 10 F km of the transmission line is _____ nF/km.

Q.3 A single phase, two wire transmission line, 15 km

long is made up of round conductors, each 0.8 cm
5m 5m
in diameter, separated from each other by 40 cm.
The line to line capacitance of the transmission
line is _____ nF. 8m
 GATE ACADEMY® 11 Parameters of Transmission Line
Q.9 A 3 − φ , 50 Hz, 132 kV overhead line has Q.14 A three phase transmission line has flat, horizontal
conductors placed in a horizontal plane 4 m apart. spacing with 2 m between adjacent conductors.
Conductor diameter is 2 cm. If the line length is The radius of each conductor is 0.25 cm. At a
100 km, the charging current per phase assuming certain instant the charges on the center conductor
complete transposition is _____ Amp. and on one of the outside conductors are identical

Q.10 A 3 − φ , 60 Hz line has flat horizontal spacing. The and voltage drop between these identically
charged conductors is 775 V. Neglect the effect of
conductors have an outside diameter of 3.28 cm
ground, and find the value of the identical charge
with 12 m between conductors. Determine the
in Coulomb/km at the instant specified.
capacitive reactance to neutral of the line if its
length is 125 miles. (A) 1 × 10 − 5 C/km (B) 2 × 10 − 5 C/km

(A) 0.61 kΩ (B) 1.61 kΩ (C) 3 × 10 − 5 C/km (D) 4 × 10 − 5 C/km

(C) 2.61 kΩ (D) 3.61 kΩ Q.15 The capacitance to neutral per km of a double

Q.11 A 3-phase, 50 Hz, 66 kV overhead line conductors circuit 3 − φ line with transposition is _____ nF.

are placed in a horizontal plane as shown in Given D = 7 m and radius of each of the six
figure. The conductor diameter is 1.25 cm. If the conductors is 1.38 cm.
line length is 100 km. Calculate the capacitance per a b c a' b' c'
phase and charging current per phase. Assume D D D D D
complete transposition of the line.
2m 2.5 m
Statement For Linked Questions 16 & 17
A B C The six conductors of a double circuit three phase
(A) 9.1 nF/km, 10.9 A (B) 8.1 nF/km, 9.9 A line having an overall radius of 0.865 × 10 −2 m are
(C) 9.1 nF/km, 9.9 A (D) 8.1 nF/km, 10.9 A arranged as shown.

Q.12 A 3 − φ , 50 Hz, transmission line has flat horizontal 6m

a c’
spacing with 3.5 m between adjacent conductors.
4m
The conductors have an outside diameter of 1.05 8m
cm. The voltage of the line is 110 kV. The phase b b’
charging current per km of line and the reactive 4m
VA generated by the line per km are :
c a’
(A) 0.165 A, 21.4 kVAR (B) 0.265 A, 21.4 kVAR
Q.16 Find the capacitance to neutral.
(C) 0.165 A, 31.4 kVAR (D) 0.165 A, 21.4 kVAR
(A) 1.8 μF/km (B) 0.18 μF/km
Q.13 A 3 − φ transmission line has flat, horizontal
spacing with 2 m between adjacent conductors. At (C) 0.018 μF/km (D) 18 μF/km
a certain instant the charge on one of the outside Q.17 Find the charging current per km per conductor at
conductors is 60 μC/ km and the charge on the 110 kV, 50 Hz.
center conductor and on the other outside (A) 0.18 A/km (B) 0.27 A/km
conductor is −30 μC / km . The radius of each (C) 0.36 A/km (D) 0.45 A/km
conductor is 0.8 cm. Neglect the effect of ground
Q.18 The capacitance of an overhead transmission line
and find the voltage drop between the two
increases with [IES 2002]
identically charged conductors at the instant
1. increase in mutual geometrical mean distance
specified.
2. increase in height of conductors above
(A) 548 V (B) 648 V
ground
(C) 748 V (D) 848 V
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 12 GATE ACADEMY®
Select the correct answer from the following Q.22 A composite conductor consists of three
(A) Both 1 and 2 are true conductors of radius R each. The conductors are
(B) Both 1 and 2 are false arranged as shown below. The geometric mean
radius (GMR) (in cm) of the composite conductor
(C) Only 1 is true
is kR. The value of k is ________.
(D) Only 2 is true
[GATE 2015-Kanpur]
Q.19 Calculate the capacitance to neutral in F/m of a
single phase line composed of two solid circular 3R
R
conductors each having a diameter of 0.229 ft. The 600
conductors are 10 ft apart and 25 ft above ground.
D
qa a b - qa
600
H1 H12
Q.23 Consider a bundled conductor of an overhead
line, consisting of three identical sub conductors
- qa qa
placed at the corners of an equilateral triangle as
(A) 12.5 nF/km (B) 22.5 nF/km shown in the figure. If we neglect the charges on
(C) 32.5 nF/km (D) 42.5 nF/km the other phase conductors and ground, and
Q.20 A two-conductor single-phase line operates at 50 assume that spacing between sub conductors is
Hz. The diameter of each conductor is 20 mm and much larger than their radius, the maximum
the spacing between the conductors is 3 m. The electric field intensity is experienced at
height of conductors above ground is 6 m. [GATE 2007-Kanpur]
Determine :
(1) the neutral capacitance of the line neglecting
the effect of ground.
(2) the line capacitance of the line considering the
effect of ground.
(3) the factor by which the radius increases in
presence of ground. (A) Point X (B) Point Y
(4) the percentage change in neutral capacitance (C) Point Z (D) Point W
in presence of ground Q.24 Bundled conductors are mainly used in high
Q.21 Calculate the capacitance reactance to neutral at 60 voltage overhead transmission lines to
Hz of a three phase line shown. Assume the radius [GATE 2003-Madras]
of the conductors to be 1.64 cm.
(A) reduce transmission line losses
12 m 12 m
(B) increase mechanical strength of the line
1 2 3
(C) reduce corona
20 m (D) reduce sag
Q.25 For an extra high voltage overhead transmission
20 m line, four conductors are used per phase (in a
1 2 3 bundle) at the corners of a square of side s metre.
The GMR (Geometric Mean Radius) of each
(A) 1.22 ×108 Ω -m (B) 2.22 × 108 Ω -m
conductor is rm ' metre. [IES 2008]
(C) 3.22 × 108 Ω -m (D) 4.22 × 108 Ω -m
GATE ACADEMY® 13 Parameters of Transmission Line

( ) (r '× s )
1/ 4
3 1/ 4 3. Corona loss causes interference in adjoining
(A) rm ' × s 2 × 2 s (B) m
communication lines.
(C) ( rm ' × 3s )
3 1/ 4
(
(D) rm ' × ( 2s ))
3 1/ 4
Which of these statements are correct?
(A) 1 and 2 (B) 2 and 3
Q.26 When bundled conductors are used in place of
(C) 1 and 3 (D) 1, 2 and 3
single conductors, the effective inductance and
Q.32 A bundled conductor line compared to a single
capacitance will respectively [IES 2004]
conductor line (with same conductor cross
(A) increase and decrease sectional area and same mean distance between
(B) decrease and increase conductors) has
(C) decrease and remain unaffected Self GMD Mutual GMD per phase inductance
(D) remain unaffected and increase Lower Nearly same Higher
Q.27 DS is the GMR of each sub conductor of a four Higher Lower Nearly same
sub conductor bundle conductor and d is the Higher Nearly same Lower
bundle spacing. What is the GMR of the Lower Higher Higher
equivalent single conductor? [IES 2004]
Common Data For Questions 33 to 43
(A) 1.09 DS × d 3 (B) 1.09 Ds3 × d 3
Find the GMR of bundled conductors with respect
(C) 1.09 4 Ds3 × d 3 (D) 1.09 4 Ds × d 3 to inductance in terms of the radius ‘r’ of an
individual strand.
Q.28 Which one of the following statements is not
Q.33
correct for the use of bundled conductors in
transmission lines? [IES 2003]
(A) Control of voltage gradient (A) 0.948 r (B) 1.048 r

(B) Reduction in corona loss (C) 1.148 r (D) 1.248 r

Q.34
(C) Reduction in radio interference
(D) Increase in interference with communication
lines
Q.29 Bundled conductors are used for EHV (A) 1.26 r (B) 1.36 r
transmission lines primarily for reducing the (C) 1.46 r (D) 1.56 r
(A) corona loss [IES 2001] Q.35

(B) surge impedance of the line

(C) voltage drop across the line (A) 1.704 r (B) 1.604 r
2
(D) I R losses (C) 1.504 r (D) 1.404 r
Q.30 The self GMD of a conductor with three strands Q.36
each of radius ‘r’ and touching each other is
[IES 2000]
1/3
(A) r (0.7788 × 2 × 2) (B) r (0.7788 × 2 × 2 × 2)
(A) 1.623 r (B) 1.723 r
(C) r (0.7788 × 2 × 2 × 2)3 (D) r (0.7788 × 2 × 2)3 (C) 1.823 r (D) 1.923 r
Q.31 Consider the following statements : [IES 1999] Q.37
1. By using bundle conductors in an overhead
line, the corona loss is reduced.
2. By using bundle conductors, the inductance of
transmission line increases and capacitance (A) 1.39 r (B) 1.49 r
reduces.
(C) 1.59 r (D) 1.69 r
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 14 GATE ACADEMY®
Q.38 Q.43 A single phase transmission line is composed of
composed of four equal bundles. The radius of
each sub conductor is 0.6 cm. The capacitance to
neutral is _____ nF/km.

(A) 1.1 r (B) 2.1 r 1 2

(C) 3.1 r (D) 4.1 r
Q.39 D = 4.5 m

(A) 1.176 r (B) 1.716 r

(C) 2.176 r (D) 2.716 r
Q.40 To increase the visual critical voltage of corona for
an overhead line, one solid phase conductor is
replaced by bundle of four smaller conductors per
phase, having an aggregate cross sectional area
equal to that of the solid conductor. If the radius of
the solid conductor is 40 mm, then the radius of
each of the bundle conductors would be ____ mm.
Q.41 A single circuit, 3−φ transmission line is
composed of four bundled conductors per phase
with horizontal configuration as shown. If the
radius of each conductor in the bundle is 1.725 cm,
the inductance of the line is _____ mH/km.

0.5 m 0.5 m 0.5 m

14 m 14 m

Q.42 A single circuit, 3−φ transmission line is

composed of three bundled conductors per phase
with horizontal configuration as shown. The lines
are fully transposed. The radius of each sub
conductor is 0.5 cm. The capacitance to neutral of
line is _____ nF/km.
A B C

5m 5m
 GATE ACADEMY® 15 Parameters of Transmission Line

Answer Keys

Objective & Numerical Answer Type Questions

1. Skin 2. A 3. C 4. A 5. 1.208
6. C 7. D 8. B 9. B 10. B
11. C 12. 0.096 13. C 14. C 15. C
16. C 17. 29.13 18. 4 19. 1.48 20. D

21. * 22. * 23. 0.289 24. A 25. 1.427

26. A 27. A 28. D 29. C 30. 0.5167

31. 1.294 32. 0.386 33. 12.7 34. C 35. C

36. D 37. C 38. B 39. 0.0728 40. 0.0305

41. 0.0588 42. A 43. C 44. 1.44 45. 1.2

46. 0.116 47. D 48. 1.363 49. 1.421 50. 0.202

Practice (Objective & Numerical Answer) Questions

1. 0.51 2. B 3. 90.6 4. C, D 5. C

6. C 7. 7.826 8. 13.67 9. 21.4 0. B

11. A 12. C 13. C 14. C 15. 17.6

16. C 17. A 18. B 19. A 20. *

21. C 22. 1.9137 23. B 24. C 25. A

26. B 27. D 28. D 29. A 30. A

31. C 32. C 33. D 34. C 35. A
36. B 37. D 38. B 39. C 40. 20
41. 0.876 42. 8.33 43. 9.25
21. (1) 4.84, (2) 0.161
22. (1) 2.14 mH/km, (2) 0.67 Ω / km , (3) 7 mH/km
20. (1) 9.75 nF/km, (2) 4.9 nF/km, (3) 1.03, (4) 0.5%


 3 Performance of
Transmission Line

Objective & Numerical Ans Type Questions : (B) voltage increases, power factor increases.
(C) voltage decreases, power factor decreases.
Q.1 The concept of an electrically short, medium and
long line is primarily based on the (D) voltage constant, power factor decreases.
Q.5 For transmission line which one of the following
[Gate 2006-Kharagpur]
relations is true? [IES 2004, IES 2002]
(A) Nominal voltage of the line
(A) −AB + CD = −1 (B) AD + CB = 1
(B) Physical length of the line
(C) AB − CD = −1 (D) −AD + BC = −1
(C) Wavelength of the line
Q.6 Under no load condition, the current in a
(D) Power transmitted over the line transmission line is because of
Q.2 In a DC transmission line [Gate 1999-Bombay] (A) Capacitance effect
(A) it is necessary for the sending end and (B) Corona effect
receiving end to be operated in synchronism (C) Proximity effect
(B) the effects of inductive and capacitive (D) Back flow from earth
reactance are greater than in an AC Q.7 A single phase transmission line of impedance
transmission line of the same rating j0.8 Ω supplies a resistive load of 500 A at 300 V.
(C) there are no effects due to inductive and The sending end power factor is :
capacitive reactances
[Gate 1994-Kharagpur, IES 1996]
(D) power transfer capability is limited by stability (A) unity (B) 0.8 lag
considerations
(C) 0.8 lead (D) 0.6 lag
Q.3 For a 500 Hz frequency excitation, a 50 km long
Q.8 In modeling the equivalent circuit of a short length
power line will be modeled as
overhead transmission line, the line resistance and
(A) short line [Gate 1996-Bangalore] inductance are only considered because line
(B) medium line capacitance to ground is [IES 2010]
(C) long line (A) equal to zero
(D) data insufficient for decision (B) finite but very small

Q.4 When a fixed amount of power is to be (C) finite but very large
transmitted, the efficiency of transmission (D) infinite
increases when [GATE 1991-Madras] Q.9 A 10 km long lossless transmission line has a
(A) voltage decreases, power factor remains reactance of 3 Ω/km and negligible shunt
constant. capacitance. The value of ABCD is [IES 2010]
 GATE ACADEMY® 17 Performance of Transmission Lines
1 0 1 0  Q.16 Consider two parallel short transmission lines of
(A)   (B)  
 j3 1  3 1  impedances Z A and Z B respectively as shown in
1 j3   1 3 the figure, currents I A and I B are both lagging
(C)  (D) 
0 1  
 0 1 and the sending-end voltage is V s , if the
Q.10 If X is the inductive reactance/phase and R is the reactance to resistance ratio of both the
resistance/phase of a short transmission line, what impedances Z A and Z B are equal, then the total
is the power factor angle of the load for maximum current ‘ I ’ will
voltage regulation? [IES 2006]
[IES 1997]
(A) cos −1 ( X / R ) (B) tan −1 ( X / R )
IA
(C) cos −1 ( R / X ) (D) tan −1 ( R / X ) VS ZA VR
I I
Q.11 For some given transmission line expression for
VS − VR IB
voltage regulation is given by × 100% . ZB
VR
(A) lag both I A and I B
Hence, [IES 2002]
(A) this must be a short line (B) lead both I A and I B

(B) this may either be a medium line or short line (C) lag one of I A and I B

(C) this expression is true for any line (D) be in phase with both I A and I B
(D) this may either be a medium line or long line Q.17 If in a short transmission line, resistance and
Q.12 In a short transmission line, voltage regulation is inductance are found to be equal and regulation
zero when the power factor angle of the load at appears to be zero, then the load will [IES 1997]
the receiving end side is equal to [IES 2001] (A) have unity power factor
X R (B) have zero power factor
(A) tan −1   (B) tan −1  
R X
(C) be 0.707 leading
X R
(C) tan −1   (D) tan −1   (D) be 0.707 lagging
Z Z
Q.18 For a transmission line with resistance R reactance
Q.13 The values of A, B, C and D constants for a short
X and negligible capacitance the generation
transmission line are respectively [IES 2000]
constant A is [IES 1996]
(A) Z, 0, 1 and 1 (B) 0, 1, 1 and 1
(A) 0 (B) 1
(C) 1, Z, 0 and 1 (D) 1, 1, Z and 0
(C) R + jX (D) R + X
Q.14 If a short transmission line is delivering to a
Q.19 A short transmission line, having its line
lagging p.f. load, the sending end p.f. would be
impedance angle as θ , is delivering a given power
(notations have their usual meaning) [IES 2000]
at the receiving end at a lagging power factor
V cos φ + IR sin φ V cos φ + IR angle of φ . Which one of the following is a set of
(A) R (B) R
VS VS
conditions for which this line will have maximum
V sin φ + IR V sin φ + IR cos φ and zero regulation? [IES 1996]
(C) R (D) R
VS VS
Maximum Regulation Zero Regulation
Q.15 A short transmission line has a total resistance of 2
(A) φ = θ φ−θ = π/ 2
pu, reactance of 3 pu, current of 125 A and p.f. of
0.8. Regulation in percentage is equal to (B) φ − θ = π / 2 φ=θ

(A) 1.9 (B) 0.38 [IES 1999] (C) φ = θ φ+θ = π/ 2

(C) 3.4 (D) 0.19 (D) φ + θ = π / 2 φ=θ

Power System Analysis [Workbook] 18 GATE ACADEMY®
Q.20 A single phase short transmission line is (A) 47.4 μF , 93.37% (B) 57.4 μF , 95.37%
supplying a load of 12 kW at a 0.8 lagging power (C) 67.4 μF , 97.37% (D) 47.4 μF , 97.37%
factor. The transmission line has a resistance of 5
Q.27 A 3 − φ voltage of 11 kV is applied to a line having
Ω and a reactance of 10 Ω respectively. If the
terminal voltage across the load is 440 V, then the R = 10 Ω and X = 12 Ω per conductor. At the
sending end voltage would be end of the line is a balanced load of P kW at a
(A) 800∠12.310 V (B) 726.18∠10.830 V leading pf. At what value of P is the voltage
regulation zero when the power factor of the load
(C) 822∠36.860 V (D) 341∠ 63.4 0 V
is 0.707 and 0.85?
Q.21 A 3-phase overhead short line has a resistance and (A) 992.75 kW, 1834.85 kW
reactance per phase of 5 Ω and 20 Ω respectively.
(B) 892.75 kW, 1634.85 kW
The sending end voltage is 46.85 kV while the
(C) 792.75 kW, 1434.85 kW
receiving end voltage is 33 kV at 0.8 pf lagging.
(D) None of the above
The sending end power factor is ____ lag.
Q.28 The A, B, C, D constants of a 220 kV line are
Q.22 A 10 km long, single phase short transmission line
0 A = D = 0.94 ∠10 , B = 130 ∠730 and C = 0.001∠900.
has 0.5∠60 Ω/km impedance. The line supplies a
If the sending end voltage of the line for a given
316.8 kW load at 0.8 pf lagging at 3.3 kV. The
load delivered at nominal voltage is 240 kV, then
sending end power _____ kW.
voltage regulation of the line is
Q.23 A 60 Hz, short transmission line, having R = 0.62
[Gate 2006-Kharagpur]
Ω and L = 93.24 mH per phase supplies a 3 − φ , Y
(A) 5% (B) 9%
connected 100 MW load of 0.9 lagging pf at 215 kV
line to line. Calculate (C) 16% (D) 21%

(1) the sending end voltage per phase. Q.29 Two identical three-phase transmission lines are
connected in parallel to supply a total load of 100
(2) the voltage regulation.
MW at 132 kV and 0.8 p.f. lagging at the receiving
(3) the efficiency of the transmission line. end. The ABCD constants of each transmission
Q.24 A 15 km long 3-phase overhead line is supplying a line are as follows : [GATE 1995-Kanpur]
5 MW load at 11 kV and 0.8 lagging pf. The line A = D = 0.98∠10 ; B = 100∠750 ohms per phase;
inductance is 1.1 mH/km/phase and the line loss is 0
C = 0.0005∠90 Siemens per phase. Determine
12% of the power delivered. Calculate
(1) The ABCD constants of the combined
(1) the value of line resistance per phase.
network.
(2) the value of line voltage at sending end. (2) The sending end power factor.
Statement for Linked Questions 25 & 26 Q.30 The generalized circuit constants of a three phase,
A single phase 50 Hz system supplies an inductive 220 kV rated voltage, medium length transmission
load of 5000 kW at pf 0.8 lag through a 25 km line. line are [Gate 2004-Delhi]
R = 0.0195 Ω/km , L = 0.63 mH/km , VR = 10 kV . A = D = 0.936 + j 0.016 = 0.936∠0.980
Q.25 Calculate voltage regulation and transmission B = 33.5 + j138 = 142∠76.40
efficiency. Use approximate result.
C = (−5.18 + j 914) × 10−6
(A) 21%, 96.33% (B) 24%, 97.33%
If the load at the receiving end is 50 MW at 220 kV
(C) 27%, 98.33% (D) 21%, 98.33% with a power factor of 0.9 lagging, then magnitude
Q.26 Find the efficiency and value of capacitor to be of line to line sending end voltage should be
connected across load if the regulation is 50% of (A) 133.23 kV (B) 220.00 kV
above case.
(C) 230.78 kV (D) 246.30 kV
GATE ACADEMY® 19 Performance of Transmission Lines
Q.31 A 220 kV, 20 km long, three phase transmission Q.37 A medium line with parameters A, B, C, D,
line has the following A, B, C, D constants. extended by connecting a short line of impedance
0
A = D = 0.96∠3 [Gate 1999-Bombay] Z in series. The overall ABCD parameters of the
series combination will be
B = 55∠650 Ω /phase
(A) A, AZ, C+D/Z, D (B) A, AZ+B, C, CZ+D
C = 0.5 × 10−4 ∠800 S/phase
(C) A+BZ, B, C+DZ, D (D) AZ, B, C/Z, D
Its charging current per phase is
Q.38 A 50 Hz, three phase transmission line of length
(A) 11 / 3 A (B) 11A
100 km has a capacitance of (0.03/π) μF/km . It is
(C) 220 A (D) 220 / 3 A
represented as nominal π . The shunt admittance
Q.32 A 66 kV, three phase, 50 Hz, 150 km long at each end of transmission line will be
overhead transmission line is open circuited at the −6 0 −6 0
(A) 150 ×10 ∠90 S (B) 100 ×10 ∠90 S
receiving end. Each conductor has a resistance of
−6 0 −6 0
0.25 Ω/km , an inductive reactance of 0.5 Ω/km (C) 50 ×10 ∠90 S (D) 10 ∠90 S

and a capacitive admittance to neutral of 0.04 × Q.39 The ABCD constants of a 3 − φ transmission line
0
10−4 S/km . [Gate 1999-Bombay] are : A = D = 0.936∠0.98

(1) Draw the nominal - π equivalent circuit and B = 142∠ 76.4 0 Ω

indicate the value of each parameter. C = 0.914∠90.30 mS

(2) Calculate the receiving end voltage if the The load at the receiving end is 50 MW at 220 kV
sending end voltage is 66 kV. with a pf of 0.9 lag. Find the voltage regulation
Q.33 The charging current of a 400 kV transmission line assuming the magnitude of sending end voltage
is more than that of a 220 kV line of the same remains constant is _____%.
length. [GATE 1994-Kharagpur] Q.40 A 3 − φ , 132 kV, nominal T transmission line is
Q.34 If a medium transmission line is represented by connected to a 50 MW load at a power factor of
nominal T , the value of B of ABCD constant is 0.85 lagging. The line constants of the 80 km long
[IES 2016] line are Z = 96∠780 Ω are Y = 0.001∠900 S .
 1 
(A) Z (B) Y  1 + YZ  (1) the sending end voltage per phase.
 4 
(2) the sending end current.
 1   1 
(C) Z  1 + YZ  (D)  1 + YZ  (3) the efficiency of transmission.
 4   2 
Q.41 The sending end voltage, current and power factor
Q.35 The charging reactance of 50 km length of the line
of the 3- φ line is 260 kV line to line, 300 A and 0.9
is 1500 Ω . What is the charging reactance for 100
km length of the line? [IES 2005] lagging. The ABCD parameters are :

(A) 1500 Ω (B) 3000 Ω A = D = 0.89∠1.340

(C) 750 Ω (D) 600 Ω B = 186.82 ∠ 79.45 0 Ω
Q.36 The ABCD constants of a three phase transmission C = 1.13 × 10 −3 ∠90.410 S
line are [IES 2001]
Calculate :
0
A = D = 0.8∠ 1
(1) the line to line receiving end voltage.
B = 170∠850 Ω
(2) the receiving end current.
C = 0.002∠90.40 mho (3) the receiving end power factor.
The sending end voltage is 400 kV. The receiving Statement For Linked Questions 42 to 45
end voltage under no load condition is
A 3 − φ transmission line serves a load of 400
(A) 400 kV (B) 500 kV
MVA, 0.8 lagging p.f. at 345 kV. The ABCD
(C) 320 kV (D) 417 kV
constants of the line are :
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 20 GATE ACADEMY®
A = D = 0.818∠1.30 Q.51 The nominal- π circuit of a transmission line is
B = 172.2∠84.2 0 Ω shown in the figure
Z
C = 0.001933∠90.40 S
Q.42 Determine the sending end line to neutral voltage
X X
and the sending end current.
(A) 156.74 kV, 347.67 A (B) 256.74 kV, 447.67 A
(C) 356.74 kV, 547.67 A (D) None of these
Impedance Z = 100∠800 Ω and reactance
Q.43 Determine the % voltage drop for above case.
X = 3300 Ω . The magnitude of the characteristic
(A) 22.4% (B) 26.7%
impedance of the transmission line (in Ω ) is
(C) 28.9% (D) None of these
_____. (Give the answer up to one decimal place).
Q.44 Determine the receiving end line to neutral
[GATE 2017-Roorkee]
voltage and the sending end current at no load.
Q.52 In a long transmission line with r, l, g and c are the
(A) 313.7 kV, 606.7 A (B) 256.74 kV, 496.28 A
resistance, inductance, shunt conductance and
(C) 213.42 kV, 368.13 A (D) None of these
capacitance per unit length, respectively, the
Q.45 Determine the voltage regulation for above case. condition for distortionless transmission is
(A) 52.6% (B) 57.6% [GATE 2014-Kharagpur]
(C) 62.6% (D) None of these
(A) rc = lg (B) r = l / c
Statement For Linked Answer Questions 46 to 50
(C) rg = lc (D) g = c/l
A 40 MVA generating station is connected to a
Q.53 For a 400 km long transmission line, the series
three phase line having
impedance is (0.0 + j 0.5) Ω /km and the shunt
Z = 300 ∠750 Ω , Y = 0.0025 ∠ 90 0 Ω −1
admittance is (0.0 + j5.0) μmho/km. The magnitude
The power at the generating station is 40 MVA at
of the series impedance (in Ω ) of the equivalent π
unity power factor at a voltage of 120 kV. There is
circuit of the transmission line is___________.
load of 10 MW at upf at the mid point of the line.
[GATE 2014-Kharagpur]
Use nominal T-circuit for the line.
Q.54 The extra high voltage transmission line of length
Q.46 Calculate the current in the capacitor.
300 km can be approximated by the lossless line
(A) 0.19 kA (B) 0.15 kA
having propagation constant β = 0.00127 radians
(C) 0.17 kA (D) None of these
per km. Then the percentage ratio of the line
Q.47 Calculate the current in midpoint upf load.
length to wavelength will be given by
(A) 0.049 kA (B) 0.49 kA
[GATE 2008-Bangalore]
(C) 4.9 kA (D) None of these
(A) 24.24% (B) 12.12%
Q.48 Calculate the current at the receiving end
(C) 19.05% (D) 6.06%
(A) 0.156 kA (B) 0.356 kA
Q.55 The total reactance and total susceptance of a
(C) 0.556 kA (D) None of these
lossless overhead EHV line, operating at 50 Hz,
Q.49 Calculate the receiving end voltage. are given by 0.045 pu and 1.2 pu respectively. If
(A) 69.72 kV (B) 79.72 kV the velocity of wave propagation is 3 ×105 km/s,
(C) 89.72 kV (D) None of these then the approximate length of the line is
Q.50 Calculate the receiving end load. [GATE 2007-Kanpur]
(A) 20 MW (B) 23 MW (A) 122 km (B) 172 km
(C) 26 MW (D) None of these (C) 222 km (D) 272 km
 GATE ACADEMY® 21 Performance of Transmission Lines
Q.56 A cable has the following characteristics L = 0.201 Q.60 Equivalent π model is quite suitable for analyzing
μH/m and C = 196.2 pF/m . The velocity of wave the performance of transmission line of
propagation through the cable is (A) 50 km length [IES 2005]
[GATE 1998-Delhi] (B) 150 km length
(A) 32 m/s (B) 159.24 m/ μ s (C) 250 km length
(C) 0.0312 m/s (D) 159.24 m/s (D) All of the above lengths
Q.57 The surge impedance of a 400 km long overhead
Practice (objective & Num Ans) Questions :
transmission line is 400 ohms. For a 200 km length
of the same line, the surge impedance will be Q.1 Assertion (A) : In the modeling of medium and
[GATE 1995-Kanpur] long transmission lines the nominal π and T
(A) 200 Ω (B) 800 Ω circuits are not equivalent to each other.
(C) 400 Ω (D) 100 Ω Reason (R) : A star-delta transformation can be
Q.58 A long overhead lossless power transmission line used to derive the one circuit from the other.
is terminated with its characteristic impedance. [IES 2002]
While the line is in operation [IES 2015] (A) Both A and R are true and R is the correct
(A) A resonance of reactive powers occurs in the explanation of A
line
(B) Both A and R are true but R is NOT a correct
(B) The line becomes purely inductive explanation of A
(C) The line becomes purely capacitive
(C) A is true but R is false
(D) There is no reflected wave on the line
(D) A is false but R is true
Q.59 For a loss free long transmission line, the
Q.2 A transmission line has inductance of 0.22 mH per
conventional line equations become, [IES 2006]
km and capacitance of 0.202 μF per km. The surge
VS = (cos β l )VR + ( j Z c sin βl ) I R and
impedance of the line is [IES 2002]
 j sin βl 
IS =  VR + (cos βl ) I R (A) 28 Ω (B) 33 Ω
 Zc 
(C) 42 Ω (D) 50 Ω
Which one of the following statements is correct?
If the line is terminated at the receiving end by its Q.3 The propagation constant of a transmission line is
natural load impedance Z C , then 0.15 ×10−3 + j1.5 ×10−3 . The wave length of the

(A) The voltage is constant in magnitude at all travelling wave is [IES 1997]
points along the line and V S and V R always 1.5 × 10 −3 2π
(A) (B)
remain in phase. 2π 1.5 × 10 −3

(B) The voltage is constant in magnitude at all 1.5 × 10 −3 π

(C) (D)
points along the line but V S advances in π 1.5 × 10 −3

phase relative to V R by an angle β radians per Q.4 A transmission line has an electrical line length of

km. 6 0 . If it is a 50 Hz system, the line length is _____

(C) The magnitude of the voltage along the line km.
0
changes in proportion to the line length, and Q.5 A line has an electrical line length of 8 . At 60 Hz,
V S and V R always remain in phase. the ratio of line length to wavelength is ________.
(D) The magnitude of the voltage along the line Q.6 The velocity of traveling wave through a cable of
changes in proportion to the line length, V S relative permittivity 9 is
advances in phase relative to V R by β radians 8
(A) 9 ×10 m/s
8
(B) 3 ×10 m/s
per km. 8
(C) 2 ×10 m/s
8
(D) 10 m/s
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 22 GATE ACADEMY®
Q.7 A 3 − φ , 50 Hz, 400 kV, transmission line is 300 km (A) 32.8 kV, 27.35 kV (B) 42.8 kV, 37.35 kV
long. The line inductance is 0.97 mH/km per phase (C) 52.8 kV, 47.35 kV (D) None of these
and capacitance is 0.0115 μF/km per phase. Q.15 Calculate the sending end voltage for above case.
Assume lossless line, the wavelength is _____ km. (A) 91.7 ∠1.37 0 kV (B) 81.7 ∠ 2.37 0 kV
Q.8 The series reactance and shunt susceptance of a
(C) 71.7 ∠3.37 0 kV (D) None of these
lossless EHV line operating at 50 Hz are given by
Q.16 Calculate the incident and reflected voltage to
0.00052 pu and 0.0014 pu per km length. The
neutral at the receiving end for an open circuited
approximate wavelength of the line is ______ km.
end voltage of 220 kV.
Q.9 At a frequency of 80 MHz, a lossless transmission
line has a characteristic impedance of 300 Ω and a (A) 63.51 kV, 63.51 kV (B) 110 kV, 63.51 kV

wavelength of 2.5 m. Find inductance in μH/m (C) 63.51 kV, 110 kV (D) None of these

and capacitance in pF/m . Q.17 At no load condition, a 3-phase, 50 Hz, lossless

power transmission line has sending-end and
(A) 15, 1.667 (B) 15, 16.67
receiving-end voltages of 400 kV and 420 kV
(C) 1.5, 1.667 (D) 1.5, 16.67
respectively. Assuming the velocity of traveling
Q.10 A 3 − φ , 60 Hz transmission line is 250 km long.
wave to be the velocity of light, the length of the
The voltage at the sending end is 220 kV. The line line, in km, is ____________.
parameters are R = 0.2 Ω /km , X = 0.8 Ω /km and
[Gate 2016-Bangalore]
Y = 5.3 μS/km . The sending end current when
Q.18 The ABCD parameters of a three phase overhead
there is no load on the line is ____ A. transmission line are
Statement for Linked Questions 11 to 16
A = D = 0.9 ∠ 00
A 200 m transmission line has the following
B = 200 ∠ 900 Ω
parameters at 60 Hz.
Resistance, r = 0.21 Ω/m per phase C = 0.95 ×10−3 ∠ 900 S
Series reactance, x = 0.78 Ω/m per phase At no load condition a shunt inductive reactor is
Shunt susceptance, b = 5.42 × 10 −6 S/m per phase connected at the receiving end of the line to limit

Q.11 Calculate the value of attenuation constant and the receiving end voltage to be equal to the

phase constant per km. sending end voltage. The ohmic value of the
reactor is : [Gate 2003-Madras]
(A) 0.274 Np, 2.07 Rad (B) 0.374 Np, 3.07 Rad
(C) 0.474 Np, 4.07 Rad (D) None of these (A) ∞ Ω (B) 2000 Ω

Q.12 Calculate the value of wavelength and the velocity (C) 105.26 Ω (D) 1052.6 Ω
of propagation of the line. Q.19 When is the Ferranti effect on long overhead lines
(A) 2.035 km, 172.12 km/sec experienced? [IES 2008]
(B) 3.035 km, 182.12 km/sec (A) The line is lightly loaded
(C) 4.035 km, 192.12 km/sec (B) The line is heavily loaded
(D) None of these
(C) The line is fully loaded
Q.13 Calculate the characteristic impedance.
(D) The power factor is unity
(A) 286∠ − 6.530 Ω (B) 386∠ − 7.530 Ω
Q.20 Consider the following statements : [IES 2007]
(C) 486∠ − 8.530 Ω (D) None of these
1. Equivalent-T circuit of a long line is preferred
Q.14 If the line is open circuited at the receiving end to equivalent- π circuit.
and the receiving end voltage is maintained at 100
2. The nature of reactive power compensation is
kV line to line, then calculate the incident and
different for peak load and off peak load
reflected components of sending end voltage.
conditions.
GATE ACADEMY® 23 Performance of Transmission Lines
3. Ferranti effect is significant only on medium (A) Inversely proportional to magnitude of the
and long lines. voltage and that of power factor of the load.
Which of the statements given above are correct? (B) Inversely proportional to square of the voltage
(A) 1 and 2 (B) 1 and 3 and square of power factor of the load.
(C) Proportional to square of voltage and that of
(C) 2 and 3 (D) 1, 2 and 3
power factor of the load.
Q.21 For a fixed value of complex power flow in a
(D) Proportional to magnitude of the voltage only.
transmission line having a sending end voltage V,
Q.26 The active and the reactive power delivered at the
the real power loss will be proportional to
receiving end of a short transmission line of
[GATE 2009-Roorkee]
impedance Z∠ψ are respectively given by
2
(A) V (B) V
VSVR V2
PR = cos(ψ − δ) − R cos ψ , and [IES 2001]
(D) 1/ V
2
(C) 1/V Z Z
Q.22 An 800 kV transmission line has a maximum VSVR V2
QR = sin(ψ − δ) − R sin ψ , with
power transfer capacity of P. If it is operated at 400 Z Z
kV with the series reactance unchanged, then the VS and V R being the magnitude of voltages at the
new maximum power transfer capacity is sending and receiving ends, δ the power angle. At
approximately [GATE 2005-Bombay] the power limit condition, for maximum PR
(A) P (B) 2P (A) leading VARs (QR ) goes to the load for any
(C) P/2 (D) P/4 values of V S and V R
Q.23 A long loss less transmission line has a unity (B) leading VARs (QR ) goes to the load only for
power factor load at the receiving end and an ac
VS =VR
voltage source at the sending end. The parameters
(C) lagging VARs (QR ) goes to the load for any
of the transmission line are : characteristic
values of V S and V R
impedance ZC = 400 Ω , propagation constant
(D) lagging VARs (QR ) goes to the load for any
β = 1.2 ×10−3 rad/km and length l = 100 km . The
values of VS =VR
equation relating sending and receiving end is
Q.27 Match List-I (Parameter) with List-II (Effects) and
VS = VR cos(βl ) + jZC sin(βl ) I R
select the correct answer using the codes given
Compute the maximum power that can be
below the lists : [IES 1998]
transferred to the upf load at the receiving end if
List-I
VS = 230 kV . [GATE 2002-Bangalore]
A. Percent power lost in transmission
IR B. For a given current density, the conductor size
Transmission upf load
~ Lines
C. Power handling capacity of a line at a given

VS VR voltage
D. Surge impedance of a transmission line
Q.24 The locus of constant received power is a circle of
List-II
radius [IES 2013]
1. Decreases with system voltage
2
VS VR VS 2. Reduces with line length
(A) (B)
B B 3. Remains independent of line length
2 2 4. Increases with the length
VR VS − VR
(C) (D) Codes : A B C D
B B
(A) 1 2 4 3
Q.25 If a fixed amount of power is to be transmitted (B) 3 4 2 1
over certain length with fixed power loss, it can be (C) 3 2 4 1
said that volume of conductor is [IES 2010] (D) 1 4 2 3
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 24 GATE ACADEMY®
Common Data for Questions 28 & 29 Q.33 Find the steady state stability limit if
A 200 km, 3 − φ , 50 Hz transmission line has VS = VR = 200 kV
following data : (A) 130 MW (B) 140 MW
0
A = D = 0.938∠1.2 (C) 165 MW (D) 175 MW
B = 131.2∠ 72.30 Ω C = 0.001∠ 90 0 S Q.34 Find the steady state stability limit if line
The sending end voltage is 230 kV. capacitance is neglected.

Q.28 Calculate the line charging current. (A) 130 MW (B) 140 MW

(A) 141.56 A (B) 151.56 A (C) 165 MW (D) 175 MW

(C) 161.56 A (D) None of these Q.35 Find the steady state stability limit if both line
capacitance and line resistance are neglected.
Q.29 Calculate the maximum power and corresponding
reactive power per phase that can be transferred at (A) 130 MW (B) 140 MW
220 kV. (C) 165 MW (D) 175 MW
(A) 91.2 MW, 109.1 MVAR Q.36 The generalized circuit constants of a transmission
(B) 109.1 MW, 109.1 MVAR line are :

(C) 91.2 MW, 91.2 MVAR A = 0.93 + j0.016 B = 20 + j140

(D) 109.1 MW, 91.2 MVAR The load at receiving end is 60 MVA, 50 Hz, 0.8
Q.30 A 3 − φ short transmission line has a per phase p.f. lagging. The voltage at the supply end is 220
kV. Calculate the load voltage.
impedance of (0.3 + j 0.4) Ω if the receiving end
(A) 192 kV (B) 202 kV
voltage is 6351 V per phase and the voltage
(C) 212 kV (D) 222 kV
regulation is not to exceed 5%. Calculate :
Q.37 The inductance and capacitance of a 400 kV, three-
(1) the maximum power that can be transmitted.
phase, 50 Hz lossless transmission line are 1.6
(2) the receiving end power factor while
mH/km/phase and 10 nF/km/phase respectively.
supplying maximum power.
The sending end voltage is maintained at 400 kV.
(3) the total line loss for the transmission line
To maintain a voltage of 400 kV at the receiving
while supplying maximum power.
end, when the line is delivering 300 MW load, the
Q.31 A three-phase, 33 kV line feeds a per-phase load of
shunt compensation required is
10 MW. If the impedance of the line is Z = j 20 Ω,
[Gate 2016-Bangalore]
then the value of load angle to maintain a line
(A) capacitive (B) inductive
voltage of 33 kV at the load is _____ degrees.
(C) resistive (D) zero
Q.32 Two overhead lines ‘P’ and ‘Q’ are connected in
Q.38 A loss less transmission line having surge
parallel to supply a load of 10 MW at 0.8 pf
impedance loading (SIL) of 2280 MW is provided
lagging. The resistance and reactance of line ‘P’ are
with a uniformly distributed series capacitive
3 Ω and 4 Ω respectively and of the line ‘Q’ are
compensation of 30%. Then, SIL of the
4 Ω and 3 Ω respectively. The power supplied
compensated transmission line will be
by line ‘P’ is
[Gate 2008-Bangalore]
(A) 6.30 MW (B) 4.46 MW
(A) 1835 MW (B) 2280 MW
(C) 6.73 MW (D) 5.88 MW
(C) 2725 MW (D) 3257 MW
Common Data Questions for 33 to 35
Q.39 A 800 kV transmission line is having per phase
A 50 Hz transmission line 500 km long with line inductance of 1.1 mH/km and per phase line
constants given below ties up two large power capacitance of 11.68 nF/km. Ignoring the length of
areas : the line, its ideal power transfer capability in MW
R = 0.11 Ω /km L = 1.45 mH/km C = 0.009 μF/km is [Gate 2004-Delhi]
GATE ACADEMY® 25 Performance of Transmission Lines
(A) 1204 MW (B) 1504 MW Q.45 Consider the following statements : [IES 2002]
(C) 2085 MW (D) 2606 MW Addition of lumped capacitances in parallel to a
Q.40 A lossless radial transmission line with surge loss free transmission line increases
impedance loading [Gate 2001-Kanpur] 1. Characteristic impedance
(A) takes negative VAR at sending end and zero 2. Propagation constant
VAR at receiving end 3. System stability
(B) takes positive VAR at sending end and zero 4. Charging current
VAR at receiving end Which of these statements are correct?
(C) has flat voltage profile and unity power factor (A) 1 and 3 (B) 2 and 4
at all points along it
(C) 1, 2 and 3 (D) 1, 2 and 4
(D) has sending end voltage higher than receiving
Q.46 Consider the following statements : [IES 2001]
end voltages and unity power factor at
Surge impedance loading of a transmission line
sending end
can be increased by
Q.41 What is the surge impedance loading of a loss less
400 kV, 3-phase, 50 Hz overhead line of average of 1. increasing its voltage level
surge impedance of 400 ohms? [IES 2008] 2. addition of lumped inductance in parallel

(A) 400 MW (B) 400 3 MW 3. addition of lumped capacitance in series

4. reducing the length of the line
(C) 400 / 3 MW (D) 400 kW
The correct statements are
Q.42 What is the approximate value of the surge
(A) 1 and 3 (B) 1 and 4
impedance loading of a 400 kV, 3-phase, 50 Hz
overhead single circuit transmission line? (C) 2 and 4 (D) 3 and 4

[IES 2006] Q.47 A surge voltage of 1000 kV is applied to an

overhead line with its receiving end open. If the
(A) 230 MW (B) 400 MW
surge impedance of the line is 500 Ω , then the
(C) 1000 MW (D) 1600 MW
total surge power in the line is [IES 1996]
Q.43 The surge impedance of a three phase 400 kV
(A) 2000 MW (B) 500 MW
transmission line is 400Ω . The surge impedance
(C) 2 MW (D) 0.5 MW
loading (SIL) is [IES 2001]
Q.48 The L/C ratio for 132 kV and 400 kV lines are
(A) 400 MW (B) 100 MW
3 3
typically 160×10 and 62.5 ×10 respectively. The
(C) 1600 MW (D) 200 MW
natural 3-phase loading for the two lines will be
Q.44 The combined effect of series and shunt respectively [IES 1993]
compensation on transmission lines is terms of
(A) 108.9 MW and 2560 MW
degree of series compensation ( K se ) , degree of
(B) 44 MW and 2560 MW
shunt compensation ( K sh ) , and surge impedance
(C) 44 MW and 640 MW
of uncompensated line ( Z 0 ) is given by which one
(D) 640 MW and 44 MW
of the following equations? [IES 2004]
Q.49 When the load on a transmission line is equal to
(A) Z 0' = Z 0 1 − K se . 1 − K sh
the surge impedance loading
(B) Z =  1 − K se . 1 − K sh  / Z 0
'
0 (A) The receiving end voltage is less than the
sending end voltage
(C) Z 0' = Z 0 (1 − K se ) / (1 − K sh )
(B) The sending end voltage is less than the
(D) Z 0' = Z 0 (1 − K sh ) / (1 − K se ) receiving end voltage
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 26 GATE ACADEMY®
(C) The receiving end voltage is equal to the Q.56 A lossless transmission line provided with series
sending end voltage capacitor compensation of 70% provides the ideal
(D) None of the above power transfer capability of 2600 MW. If the series
capacitor is short circuited, the ideal power
Q.50 In case the characteristic impedance of a
transfer capability becomes _____.
transmission line is equal to the load impedance
Q.57 A three-phase 50 Hz, 400 kV transmission line is
(A) The system will resonate badly
300 km long. The line inductance is 1 mH/km per
(B) All the energy sent will be absorbed by the
phase and the capacitance is 0.01 μF/km per phase.
load
The line is under open circuit condition at the
(C) All the energy sent will pass to earth
receiving end and energized with 400 kV at the
(D) All the energy will be lost in transmission line sending end. The receiving end line voltage in kV
as transmission losses (round off to two decimal places) will be _______.
Q.51 If the receiving end voltage and current are [GATE 2019 - Madras]
numerically equal to the corresponding sending
end values, that is VS = VR and I S = I R , then
such a line is called
(A) An infinite line (B) A natural line
(C) A tuned line (D) A loss less line
Q.52 The open circuit and short circuit impedances of
a transmission line are 900∠ − 400 Ω and
0
400∠ − 10 Ω respectively. Its characteristic
impedance in ohms will be
(A) 1300∠ − 500 (B) 500∠ − 300
(C) 600∠ − 250 (D) 50∠ − 200
Q.53 A system has an electrical line length of 50 . If the
SIL is 100 MW the sending end voltage angle is
200 wrt to the receiving end voltage, the load
ability of the line is
(A) 100 MW (B) 192.4 M
(C) 292.4 MW (D) 392.4 MW
Q.54 A three phase 400 kV, 50 Hz, 300 km long lossless
transmission line has a series inductive reactance
Z = 0.3 Ω / km and a shunt admittance
−6
Y = 3.75 × 10 S/km . Calculate :

(1) the surge impedance.

(2) the value of propagation constant.
(3) the value of surge impedance loading.
Q.55 A lossless transmission line is having ideal power
transfer capability of 2000 MW. If uniformly
distributed series capacitance compensation is
provided the capability is increased to 3000 MW.
The degree of compensation is ________%.
GATE ACADEMY® 27 Performance of Transmission Lines

Answer Keys

Objective & Numerical Answer Type Questions

1. B 2. C 3. C 4. B 5. D
6. A 7. D 8. A 9. C 10. B
11. A 12. B 13. C 14. B 15. C
16. D 17. C 18. B 19. C 20. A
21. 0.656 22. 352.8 23. * 24. * 25. A
26. C 27. D 28. C 29. * 30. C
31. A 32. 67.5 33. True 34. C 35. C
36. B 37. B 38. A 39. 12 40. *
41. * 42. B 43. A 44. A 45. B
46. C 47. A 48. A 49. C 50. B
51. 404-409 52. A 53. 186-188 54. D 55. C
56. B 57. C 58. D 59. B 60. C
Practice (Objective & Numerical Answer) Questions
1. C 2. B 3. B 4. 100 5. 0.022
6. D 7. 5988 8. 7364 9. D 10. 185
11. A 12. B 13. B 14. C 15. A
16. A 17. 294-298 18. B 19. A 20. C
21. C 22. D 23. * 24. A 25. B
26. A 27. D 28. A 29. A 30. *
31. 33.6 32. B 33. B 34. A 35. D
36. B 37. B 38. C 39. C 40. C
41. A 42. B 43. A 44. C 45. B
46. A 47. A 48. C 49. C 50. B
51. C 52. C 53. D 54. * 55. 55.56
56. 1424 57. 418.6

23. (1) 129 kV, (2) 4%, (3) 99.83%

24. (1) 1.86 ohm, (2) 13.6 kV
 Aeq Beq   0.98∠10 50∠750 
(1)  =
Deq  0.001∠900 
29. (2) 0.7726 lag
Ceq 0.98∠10 

40. (1) 91 kV, (2) 215 A, (3) 93.7%

41. (1) 188.5 kV, (2) 372 A, (3) 0.897 lag
30. (1) 108.9 MW, (2) 0.49 lead, (3) 122.4 MW
54. (1) 282.8 Ω , (2) j0.0011 per km, (3) 565.8 MW

 4 Travelling
Waves
Objective & Numerical Ans Type Questions : (A) 36.72 kV (B) 18.36 kV
(C) 6.07 kV (D) 33.93 kV
Q.1 Consider a step voltage wave of magnitude 1 pu
Q.4 A 132 kV transmission line AB is connected to a
travelling along a lossless transmission line that
cable BC. The characteristic impedances of the
terminates in a reactor. The voltage magnitude
overhead line and the cable are 400 Ω and 80 Ω
across the reactor at the instant the travelling wave
reaches the reactor is : [GATE 2010-Guwahati] respectively. A 250 kV surge travels from A to B.
[GATE 2001-Kanpur]
(1) Calculate the value of this voltage surge when
it first reaches C.
(2) Calculate the value of reflected component of
this voltage surge when the first reflection
(A) − 1 pu (B) 1 pu reaches A.
(C) 2 pu (D) 3 pu (3) Calculate the surge current in the cable BC.
Q.2 A lightning stroke discharges impulse current of Q.5 An overhead line having a surge impedance of 400
10 kA (peak) on a 400 kV transmission line having Ω is connected in series with an underground
surge impedance of 250 Ω . The magnitude of cable having a surge impedance of 100 Ω . If a
transient over-voltage traveling waves in either surge of 50 kV travels from the line end towards
direction assuming equal distribution from the the line cable junctions, the value of the
point of lightning strike will be transmitted voltage wave at the junction is
[GATE 1999-Bombay]
[GATE 2004-Delhi]
(A) 30 kV (B) 20 kV
(A) 1250 kV (B) 1650 kV
(C) 80 kV (D) − 30 kV
(C) 2500 kV (D) 2900 kV
Q.6 The reflection coefficient for the transmission line
Q.3 A surge of 20 kV magnitude travels along a shown in figure at P is [GATE 1998-Delhi]
lossless cable towards its junction with two P
Transmission line
identical lossless overhead transmission lines. The
inductance and the capacitance of the cable are Z 0 = 300 W
0.4 mH/km and 0.5 μF/km . The inductance and Z 0 = Surge impedance Load
300 W
capacitance of the overhead transmission lines are
1.5 mH/km and 0.015 μF/km . The magnitude of
the voltage at the junction due to surge is
(A) + 1 (B) – 1
[GATE 2003-Madras]
(C) 0 (D) 0.5
 GATE ACADEMY® 29 Travelling Waves
Q.7 If a line of surge impedance Z 0 is terminated in an (A) 11.11 kV (B) 22.22 kV
impedance Z then the reflection for current and (C) 12.50 kV (D) 88.89 kV
voltage surges at the termination are given Q.12 A surge voltage rising at 100 kV/μs travels along a
respectively by [IES 2010] loss-less open circuited transmission line. It takes
Z −Z 2Z Z − Z Z − Z0 10 μs to reach the open end. The reflected wave
(A) 0 , (B) 0 ,
Z0 + Z Z 0 + Z Z0 + Z Z 0 + Z
from the open end, will be rising at [IES 2002]
Z −Z 2Z 2Z0 Z − Z0
(C) 0 , (D) , (A) 100 kV/μs (B) 200 kV/μs
Z0 + Z Z 0 + Z Z0 + Z Z 0 + Z
(C) 1000 kV/μs (D) 2000 kV/μs
Q.8 A traveling wave due to lighting with an incident
voltage V travels through the overhead line of Q.13 If a traveling wave along a loss free overhead line
surge impedance of 400 Ω and enters a cable of does not result in any reflection after it has
reached the far end, then the far end of the line is
surge impedance of 40 Ω . What is the voltage
(A) open circuited [IES 2001]
entering the cable at the junction? [IES 2006]
(A) V/11 (B) 4V/11 (B) short circuited
(C) 2V/11 (D) V (C) terminated into a resistance equal to surge
Q.9 A rectangular voltage wave is impressed on a loss impedance of the line
free overhead line, with the far end of the line (D) terminated into a capacitor
being short circuited. On reaching the end of this Q.14 An overhead line with surge impedance of 400 Ω
line [IES 2003] is terminated through a resistance ‘R’. A surge
(A) The current wave is reflected back with traveling over the line will not suffer any
positive sign, but the voltage wave with reflection at the junction, if the value of R is
negative sign (A) 100 Ω (B) 200 Ω [IES 2000]
(B) The current wave is reflected back with
(C) 400 Ω (D) 800 Ω
negative sign, but the voltage wave with
positive sign Q.15 An overhead line with a surge impedance of
(C) Both the current and the voltage waves are 400 Ω is connected to a transformer by a short
reflected with positive sign length of cable of surge impedance 100 Ω . If a
(D) Both the current and the voltage waves are rectangular surge wave of 40 kV travels along the
reflected with negative sign line towards the cable, then the voltage of the
Q.10 The reflection coefficient for the transmission line wave travelling from the junction of the overhead
shown in figure at point P is [IES 2002] line through the cable towards the transformer
would be [IES 2000]
(A) 16 kV (B) 32 kV
(C) 34 kV (D) 36 kV

Practice (objective & Num Ans) Questions :

(A) + 1 (B) 0.5 Q.1 A surge of 260 kV traveling in a line of natural

(C) 0 (D) − 1 impedance of 500 Ω arrives at a junction with two
Q.11 A surge of 100 kV travels along an overhead line lines of natural impedances of 250 Ω and 50 Ω
towards its junction with a cable. The surge respectively. The voltage transmitted in the branch
impedances for the overhead line and cable are lines is [IES 1999]
400 Ω and 50 Ω respectively. The magnitude of
(A) 400 kV (B) 260 kV
the surge transmitted through the cable is
(C) 80 kV (D) 40 kV
[IES 2002]
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 30 GATE ACADEMY®
Q.2 The reflection coefficient of a short circuited line is cable has an inductance of 0.25 mH/km and
(A) – 1 (B) + 1 [IES 1997] capacitance of 0.102 μF/km . A surge having a
(C) 0.5 (D) Zero maximum value of 100 kV travels along the
Q.3 Different terminal conditions at the receiving end overhead line towards its junction with the cable.
of a loss-less overhead transmission line having Q.5 Calculate the surge impedances of the line and
surge impedance Z are sketched in List-I. The the cable.
incident and the reflected current waves are
(A) 447.2 Ω, 49.5 Ω (B) 49.5 Ω, 447.2 Ω
sketched in List-II. Match List-I with List-II and
select the correct answer using the codes given (C) 39.5 Ω, 347.2 Ω (D) 347.2 Ω, 39.5 Ω
below the Lists : [IES 1993] Q.6 Calculate the wave propagations in the line and
List-I (Line with different terminal conditions) the cable.
Line
A. (A) 0.198 km/μs, 0.198 km/μs
Short Circuit
(B) 0.224 km/μs, 0.224 km/μs
Line
B. Open Circuit (C) 0.224 km/μs, 0.198 km/μs

Line (D) 0.198 km/μs, 0.224 km/μs

C. R=Z
Q.7 Calculate the reflected waves of voltage and
List-II (Incident and reflected current waves) current at the junction.
1. I No reflection (A) 20 kV, 179 A (B) − 80 kV, 179 A
(C) 20 kV, 402 A (D) − 80 kV, 402 A
2. I Q.8 Calculate the transmitted waves of voltage and
I current at the junction.

3. I I (A) 20 kV, 179 A (B) − 80 kV, 179 A

Codes : A B C (C) 20 kV, 402 A (D) − 80 kV, 402 A

(A) 3 2 1 Q.9 A 210 kV, 2.5 μs rectangular surge travels on a
(B) 3 1 2 line of surge impedance of 400 Ω . The line is
(C) 1 2 3 terminated in a capacitance of 2500 pF. The
(D) 1 3 2 voltage across the capacitance is _____ kV.
Q.4 A 30 Volts battery with zero source resistance is
Q.10 A 500 kV, 2.5 μs rectangular surge passes
connected to a coaxial line of characteristic
through a line having a surge impedance of
impedance of 50 ohms at t = 0 second and
400 Ω and approaches a station at which the
terminated in an unknown resistive load. The line
length is such that it takes 400 μs for an concentrated earth capacitance 3000 pF. The
maximum value of surge transmitted to the
electromagnetic wave to travel from source end to
second line is _____ kV.
load end and vice-versa. At t = 400 μs , the voltage
at the load end is found to be 40 Volts. The load Common Data for Questions 11 and 12

resistance is : A step wave of 110 kV, t μs travels through a line

(A) 25 Ohms (B) 50 Ohms having a surge impedance of 350 Ω . The line is
(C) 75 Ohms (D) 100 Ohms terminated by and inductance of 5000 μH .
Common Data for Questions 5 to 8
Q.11 Find the voltage across the inductance.
An overhead line is connected in series with a
(A) 110 ( 2e −0.07 t − 1) kV (B) 220e −0.07t kV
cable. The overhead line has an inductance of
2 mH/km and capacitance of 0.01 μF/km . The (C) 220 ( e −0.07 t − 1) kV (D) 110e −0.07t kV
GATE ACADEMY® 31 Travelling Waves
Q.12 Find the reflected voltage wave. Codes : P Q R
(A) 110 ( 2e −0.07 t − 1) kV (B) 220e −0.07t kV (A) 3 2 1

(C) 220 ( e −0.07 t − 1) kV

(B) 2 3 1
(D) 110e −0.07t kV
(C) 2 1 3
Q.13 A rectangular surge of 2.5 μs duration and
(D) 3 1 2
magnitude 120 kV travels along a line of surge
impedance 400 Ω . The latter is connected to
another line of equal impedance through an
inductor of 500 μH . The maximum value of the
surge transmitted to the second line is _____ kV.
Q.14 Different terminal conditions at the receiving end
of a lossless overhead transmission line having
surge impedance ‘Z’ are sketched in List-I. The
incident and reflected waves are sketched in List-
II. Match the List-I with List-II.
List-I List-II

(P) (1)

(Q) (2)

(R) (3)

Answer Keys

Objective & Numerical Answer Type Questions

1. C 2. A 3. D 4. * 5. B
6. C 7. B 8. C 9. A 10. C
11. B 12. A 13. C 14. C 15. A
Practice (Objective & Numerical Answer) Questions
1. D 2. A 3. A 4. D 5. A
6. C 7. B 8. C 9. 385.5 10. 875.5
11. B 12. A 13. 117.8 14. B


 5 Voltage Control & Power
Factor Improvement

Objective & Numerical Ans Type Questions : (A) 5.00, 12.68, 2.68 (B) 6.34, 10.00, 1.34
(C) 6.34, 11.34, 2.68 (D) 5.00, 11.34, 1.34
Q.1 In the figure, the voltages are
Q.3 The complex power consumed by a constant-
v1 (t ) = 100 cos (ωt ),
voltage load is given by ( P1 + jQ1 ), where,
v2 (t ) = 100 cos (ωt + π / 18)
1 kW ≤ P1 ≤ 1.5 kW and 0.5 kVAR ≤ Q1 ≤ 1 kVAR
and v3 (t ) = 100 cos (ωt + π / 36) .
A compensating shunt capacitor is chosen such
The circuit is in sinusoidal steady state, and that Q ≤ 0.25 kVAR , where Q is the net reactive
R << ωL, P1 , P2 and P3 are the average power
power consumed by the capacitor-load
outputs. Which one of the following statements is combination. The reactive power (in kVAR)
true? [GATE 2018-Guwahati] supplied by the capacitor is ________.
R L R L
[GATE 2014-Kharagpur]
Q.4 A two BUS power system shown in figure
+ + +
supplies load of (1.0 + j 0.5) pu
P1 v1 (t ) P2 v2 ( t ) P3 v3 (t )
- - - Bus1 Bus2
V1Ð00 1Ðd2
j 0.1
(A) P1 = P2 = P3 = 0 (B) P1 < 0, P2 > 0, P3 > 0 G1
(C) P1 < 0, P2 > 0, P3 < 0 (D) P1 > 0, P2 < 0, P3 > 0
j2 1.0 + j 0.5
Q.2 Consider the two bus power system network with
given loads as shown in the figure. All the values
shown in the figure are in per unit. The reactive The value of V1 in pu and δ 2 respectively are
power supplied by generator G1 and G2 are QG1 [GATE 2014-Kharagpur]
0
and QG2 respectively. The per unit values of QG1 , (A) 0.95 and 6.00 (B) 1.05 and − 5.440
QG2 and line reactive power loss (Qloss )
(C) 1.1 and − 6.000 (D) 1.1 and − 27.120
respectively are [GATE 2018-Guwahati]
Q.5 For the system shown below, S D1 and S D 2 are
1.0Ðd 1.0Ð0 complex power demands at BUS1 and BUS2
j 0.1
G1 G2 respectively. If | V2 | = 1 pu , the VAR rating of the
Qloss
20 + jQG1 15 + jQG2 capacitor (QG 2 ) connected at BUS2 is
15 + j 5 20 + j1.0 [GATE 2012-Delhi]
GATE ACADEMY® 33 Voltage Control & Power Factor Improvement
BUS 1 BUS 2 (A) 61.73 MVAR (B) 55.56 MVAR
V1 = 1Ð00 pu V2
(C) 45 MVAR (D) 40.5 MVAR
Z = j 0.5 pu
QG 2 Q.10 A shunt capacitor used in power system for VAR
SG 1 compensation is operated at 98 % of its rated
frequency and 95 % of its rated voltage. The %
S D1 = (1 + j 0 ) pu S D 2 = (1 + j 0 ) pu change in VAR supplied by shunt capacitor as
compared to its rated capacity is _____.
(A) 0.2 pu (B) 0.268 pu
Q.11 A shunt reactor at receiving end of a transmission
(C) 0.312 pu (D) 0.4 pu
line is operated at 96% of its rated voltage and
Q.6 Consider two buses connected by an impedance of 104% of its rated frequency. The % change in
0
(0 + j 5) Ω . The BUS1 voltage is 100 ∠30 V and active power consumed by it as compared to rated
0
BUS2 voltage is 100 ∠0 V . The real and reactive capacity is _____.
power supplied by BUS1, respectively are Q.12 The transmission line parameters of medium line
[GATE 2010-Guwahati] are given as per π − model

(A) 1000 W, 268 VAR A = D = 0.9∠ 0.50

(B) – 1000 W, – 134 VAR C = 0.9 ×10−4 ∠880 S

(C) 276.9 W, – 56.7 VAR At no load a shunt inductor of 2000 Ω per phase is
(D) – 276.9 W, 56.7 VAR connected to maintain VR equal to VS . If resistance

Q.7 A 3-phase, 11 kV generator feeds power to a of line is negligible and series reactance is 1 Ω per

constant power unity power factor load of 100 km. The approximate length of line is _______ km.
MW through a 3-phase transmission line. The line Q.13 At an industrial substation with an 8 MW load, a
to line voltage at the terminals of the machine is capacitor of 4 MVAR is installed to maintain load
maintained constant at 11 kV. The per unit p.f. at 0.9 leading. If a compensating element is
positive sequence impedance of the line based on also connected so that the p.f. changes to 0.9
100 MVA and 11 kV is j0.2. The line to line voltage lagging, the compensating element is
at the load terminals is measured to be less than 11 (A) Capacitor of 4.5 MVAR
kV. The total reactive power to be injected at the
(B) Inductor of 4.5 MVAR
terminals of the load to increase the line to line
(C) Capacitor of 7.75 MVAR
voltage at the load terminals to 11 kV is
(D) Inductor of 7.75 MVAR
[GATE 2003-Madras]
Q.14 A short transmission line is having negligible
(A) 100 MVAR (B) 10.1 MVAR
resistance and a reactance of 10 Ω. At receiving
(C) – 100 MVAR (D) – 10.1 MVAR
end an over excited synchronous motor is
Q.8 A shunt reactor of 100 MVAR is operated at 98% connected, the loss free synchronous motor at 10
of its rated voltage and at 96% of its rated kV is supplying a mechanical load of 2 MW at 0.8
frequency. The reactive power absorbed by the power factor. The compensation required to be
reactor is : [GATE 1998-Delhi] provided at receiving end to obtain zero voltage
(A) 98 MVAR (B) 104.02 MVAR regulation is
(C) 96.04 MVAR (D) 100.04 MVAR (A) Shunt reactor of 1.3 MVAR
Q.9 In a 400 kV network, 360 kV is recorded at a 400 (B) Shunt reactor of 1.5 MVAR
kV bus. The reactive power absorbed by a shunt (C) Shunt capacitor of 1.3 MVAR
rated for 50 MVAR, 400 kV connected at the bus is
(D) Shunt capacitor of 1.5 MVAR
[GATE 1994-Kharagpur]
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 34 GATE ACADEMY®
Q.15 A 50 Hz, 3 − φ , 275 kV, 400 km transmission line Q.21 A 3 − φ short 230 kV transmission line with a
has the following per phase parameters R = 0.035 reactance of 18 Ω per phase supplies a load at 0.85
Ω/km , L = 1 mH/km and C = 0.01 μ F/km . If the lagging pf. For a line current of 1000 A, the
line is supplied at 275 kV, determine the MVA receiving and sending end voltage are to be
rating of a shunt reactor having negligible losses maintained at 230 kV. Power drawn by the
that would be required to maintain 275 kV at the synchronous capacitor may be neglected.
receiving end when the line is delivering no load. Calculate :
Use nominal π method. (1) the rating of synchronous capacitor required.
(A) 42.5 MVA (B) 47.5 MVA (2) the load current.
(C) 52.5 MVA (D) None of these (2) the load MVA.
Common Data Question 16 & 17 Q.1 A load is supplied by a 230 V, 50 Hz source. The
active power P and the reactive power Q
A 3 − φ feeder having a resistance of 3 Ω and a
consumed by the load are such that 1 kW ≤ P ≤ 2
reactance of 10 Ω supplies a load of 2 MW at 0.85
kW and 1 kVAR ≤ Q ≤ 2 kVAR. A capacitor
lagging pf. The receiving end voltage is
connected across the load for power factor
maintained at 11 kV by means of a static
correction generates 1 kVAR reactive power. The
condenser drawing 2.1 MVAr from the line.
worst case power factor after power factor
Q.16 Calculate the sending end voltage and power connection is [GATE 2017-Roorkee]
factor.
(A) 0.447 lag (B) 0.707 lag
(A) 10.96 kV, 0.976 lead (B) 10.96 kV, 0.982 lead (C) 0.894 lag (D) 1
(C) 6.32 kV, 0.982 lead (D) None of these Q.2 The load shown in the figure absorbs 4 kW at a
Q.17 Calculate the efficiency of the feeder. power factor of 0.89 lagging.
(A) 90.5% (B) 94.5%
(C) 96.5% (D) 92.5%
Common Data Question 18 to 20
A 3 − φ overhead line has 5 + j 20 Ω per phase
impedance. The load at the receiving end is 30
Assuming the transformer to be ideal, the value of
MW, 0.85 lagging pf at 33 kV.
the reactance X to improve the input power factor
Q.18 Calculate the MVAR rating of the compensating to unity is ________. [GATE 2014-Kharagpur]
equipment inserted at the receiving end so as to
Q.3 A single phase induction motor draws 12 MW
maintain a voltage of 33 kV at each end?
power at 0.6 lagging power. A capacitor is
(A) 18.6 MVAR (B) 20.3 MVAR connected in parallel to the motor to improve the
(C) 38.9 MVAR (D) None of these power factor of the combination of motor and
Q.19 What is the value of sending end voltage without capacitor to 0.8 lagging. Assuming that the real
compensating equipment? and reactive power drawn by the motor remains
same as before, the reactive power delivered by
(A) 51 kV (B) 55 kV
the capacitor in MVAR is __________.
(C) 61 kV (D) 65 kV
[GATE 2014- Kharagpur]
Q.20 Calculate the maximum load that can be
Q.4 A 400 V, 50 Hz, three phase balanced source
transmitted with 33 kV at both the ends.
supplies power to a star connected load whose
(A) 30 MW (B) 40 MW
rating is 12 3 kVA , 0.8 power factor (lag). The
(C) 50 MW (D) None of these
rating (in kVAR) of the delta connected
GATE ACADEMY® 35 Voltage Control & Power Factor Improvement
(capacitive) reactive power bank necessary to Practice (objective & Num Ans) Questions :
bring the power factor to unity is
[GATE 2006-Kharagpur] Q.1 A factory draws 100 kW at 0.7 p.f. lagging from a
(A) 28.78 (B) 21.60 3-phase, 11 kV supply. It is desired to raise the p.f.
to 0.95 lagging using series capacitors. Calculate
(C) 16.60 (D) 12.47
the rating of the capacitor required.
Q.5 At an industrial substation with a 4 MW load, a
[GATE 1997-Madras]
capacitor of 2 MVAR is installed to maintain the
Q.2 A fluorescent lamp takes a current of 0.75 A when
load power factor at 0.97 lagging. If the capacitor
connected across a 240 V, 50 Hz ac supply. The
goes out of service, the load power factor becomes
power consumed by lamp is 80 W. Calculate the
[GATE 2005-Bombay]
value of capacitance to be connected in parallel
(A) 0.85 lag (B) 1.00 with the lamp to improve power factor to unity
(C) 0.80 lag (D) 0.90 lag and 0.95 lagging.
Q.6 A balanced delta connected load of (8 + j 6) Ω per (A) 8.9 μF, 8.46 μF (B) 7.9 μF, 8.46 μF
phase is connected to a 400 V, 50 Hz, 3-phase (C) 8.9 μF, 7.46 μF (D) 7.9 μF, 7.46 μF
supply lines. If the input power factor is to be Q.3 A 1− φ , 50 Hz motor takes 20 A at 0.75 pf lagging
improved to 0.9 by connecting a bank of star
from a 230 V sinusoidal supply. Calculate
connected capacitors, the required kVAR of the
(1) the kVAR of the capacitor to be connected in
bank is [GATE 2003-Madras]
parallel to raise the pf to 0.9 lagging.
(A) 42.7 (B) 10.2 (2) the new supply current at 0.9 lagging pf.
(C) 28.8 (D) 38.4 Q.4 A 3 − φ load draws 250 kW at a pf of 0.707 lagging
Q.7 A 240 V single phase ac source is connected to a from a 440 V line. A 3 − φ capacitor bank is
0
load with an impedance of 10∠60 Ω . A capacitor connected in parallel with this load which draws
is connected in parallel with the load. If the 60 kVA. The total current and resultant power
capacitor supplies 1250 VAr, the real power factor are :
supplied by the source is [GATE 2001-Kanpur] (A) 337 A, 0.972 lag (B) 412 A, 0.972 lag
(A) 3600 W (B) 2880 W (C) 337 A, 0.796 lag (D) 412 A, 0.796 lag
(C) 2400 W (D) 1200 W Q.5 A 415 V, 3 − φ , 50 Hz factory installation load is
Q.8 A 3-phase, 11 kV, 50 Hz, 200 kW load has a power 450 kVA at a pf of 0.6 lagging. The per phase kVA
factor of 0.8 lag. A delta connected 3-phase rating of the capacitor bank required to improve
capacitor is used to improve the power factor to the power factor to 0.95 lagging is _____.
unity. The capacitance per-phase of the capacitor Q.6 An industrial plant draws 50 kW at a power factor
in micro-farad is [GATE 1999-Bombay] of 0.8 lagging from a 220 V, 60 Hz, single phase
(A) 3.948 (B) 1.316 source. A capacitor bank is added to be in parallel

(C) 0.439 (D) 11.844 with the load to improve the power factor to 0.95
lagging. The required capacitance of the capacitor
Q.9 A circuit consisting of a single resistor R and an
bank is _____ μF .
inductor L in series is driven by a 25 V rms, 50 Hz
sinusoidal voltage source. A capacitor is to be Q.7 A 3 − φ load of 750 kW at 400 V, 50 Hz operates at

connected in parallel with the source to improve a pf of 0.7 lagging. Calculate the kVAR rating per
the power factor. Given that the average power phase and the capacitance per phase of a mesh
dissipated in the R is 100 W and that the reactive connected capacitor bank to improve the pf to 0.95
power delivered to the L is 75 VAr. What value of lagging.
C will yield a 0.9 pf lagging as seen by the source? (A) 173 kVAR, 3.44 mF (B) 300 kVAR, 5.96 mF
[GATE 1998-Delhi] (C) 428 kVAR, 8.16 mF (D) 519 kVAR, 10.32 mF
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 36 GATE ACADEMY®
Q.8 A 3 − φ motor draws 20 kVA at 0.707 pf lagging Q.11 Calculate the per phase value of capacitors, when
from a 220 V source. Determine : stator is connected in star and delta respectively,
(1) the kVAr rating of capacitors to make the and capacitor bank is connected in delta.
combined pf 0.9 lagging. (A) 9.75 μF , 9.75 μF (B) 9.75 μF , 29.22 μF
(2) the ratio of line current before and after the (C) 29.22 μF , 29.22 μF (D) 29.22 μF , 9.75 μF
addition of capacitor.
Common Data For Questions 12 to 15
Q.9 A single phase induction motor, when running
A 3 − φ , 500 kW, 3.3 kV, 50 Hz, star connected
from 230 V, 50 Hz supply, gave the following data.
induction motor works at a full load pf of 0.7 lag
No load : 2 A, 0.3 lag pf
and 86% efficiency. A delta connected capacitor
Half full load : 5 A, 0.5 lag pf
bank is used to raise the full load pf to 0.9 lag.
Full load : 10 A, 0.7 lag pf
Q.12 Calculate the per phase value of capacitor in
Calculate the capacitance required in micro farad
capacitor bank.
in parallel with the induction motor so that power
(A) 10.12 μF (B) 17.52 μF
factor of the motor capacitor combination (or the
supply power factor) is raised to unity under all (C) 30.35 μF (D) 91.05 μF
the three operating modes listed above. Q.13 If the induction motor is fed by a distribution
Codes : NL HL FL circuit, calculate the percentage saving in energy
(A) 26.40 59.93 98.82 lost as the pf is improved from 0.7 to 0.9 lag.
(B) 59.93 98.82 26.40 (A) 30% (B) 40%
(C) 98.82 26.40 59.93 (C) 50% (D) 60%
(D) 98.82 59.93 26.40 Q.14 Calculate the capacitance of each unit if each
Q.10 A 400 V, 40 kW, 3 − φ , 50 Hz induction motor runs capacitor is rated at 420 V, 50 Hz and capacitor
at a pf of 0.72 lagging with an efficiency of 85%. bank is connected in delta.
Find the capacitance per phase of a star connected (A) 3.79 μF (B) 30.35 μF
capacitor bank necessary to raise the power factor
(C) 121.4 μF (D) 242.8 μF
of the supply to 0.98 lagging.
Q.15 Calculate the capacitance of each unit if each
(A) 412.6 μF (B) 512.6 μF
capacitor is rated at 420 V, 50 Hz and capacitor
(C) 612.6 μF (D) 712.6 μF
bank is connected in star.
Common Data For Questiond 9 to 11
(A) 455.25 μF (B) 242.8 μF
An induction motor operating from a balanced
(C) 151.75 μF (D) 91.05 μF
3 − φ , 400 V, 50 Hz supply, takes a line current of
Q.16 The power consumption of an industry is 500
10 A at 0.8 pf lag. A 3 − φ capacitor bank is
kVA, at 0.8 p.f. lagging. A synchronous motor is
connected to the motor terminals which improve
added to raise the power factor of the industry to
the line pf to 0.9 lag.
unity. If the power intake of the motor is 100 kW,
Q.9 Calculate the total kVA rating of the 3 − φ
the p.f. of the motor is _____________.
capacitor bank.
[Gate 2016-Bangalore]
(A) 0.47 kVA (B) 1.47 kVA
Q.17 A synchronous motor improves pf of a load of 400
(C) 2.47 kVA (D) 3.47 kVA
kW from 0.71 lag to 0.96 lagging. Simultaneously
Q.10 Calculate the per phase value of capacitors, when
the motor carries a load of 200 kW. The leading
stator is connected in star and delta respectively,
kVAR supplied by the motor is _____.
and capacitor bank is connected in star.
Q.18 A synchronous motor improves the pf of a load of
(A) 9.75 μF , 9.75 μF (B) 9.75 μF , 29.22 μF
500 kW from 0.707 lagging to 0.95 lagging. The
(C) 29.22 μF , 29.22 μF (D) 29.22 μF , 9.75 μF motor carries a load of 100 kW. The leading kVAR,
GATE ACADEMY® 37 Voltage Control & Power Factor Improvement
the kVA rating and the power factor of the motor Q.23 Match the items in List-I with the items in List-II
are respectively : and select the correct answer using the codes
(A) 362.85, 339, 0.413 (B) 322.85, 329, 0.413 given below the lists [GATE 2009-Roorkee]
(C) 302.85, 319, 0.313 (D) 342.85, 349, 0.313 List I (To) List II (Use)
Q.19 An industrial load of 800 kW is operating at 0.6 a. improve power factor 1. shunt reactor
lagging pf. It is desired to improve the pf to 0.92 b. reduce the current 2. shunt capacitor
lagging by connecting a synchronous motor
ripples
driving a load of 200 kW with an efficiency of 91%.
c. increase the power 3. series capacitor
Determine kVA rating of the synchronous motor
and the power factor at which it is operating. flow in line
(A) 670 kVA, 0.328 lead (B) 630 kVA, 0.348 lead d. reduce the ferranti effect 4. series reactor
(C) 600 kVA, 0.308 lead (D) 570 kVA, 0.328 lead (A) a → 2, b → 3, c → 4, d → 1
Q.20 A source supplies power to the following three (B) a → 2, b → 4, c → 3, d → 1
loads connected in parallel : (C) a → 4, b → 3, c → 1, d → 2
1. A lighting load drawing 10 kW
(D) a → 4, b → 1, c → 3, d → 2
2. An induction motor drawing 10 kVA at 0.90
Q.24 Series capacitive compensation in EHV
power factor lagging
transmission lines is used to [GATE 1998-Delhi]
3. A synchronous motor operating at 10 hp, 85%
(A) reduce the line loading
efficiency and 0.95 power factor leading
If P is the real power and Q is the reactive power (B) improve the stability of the system
delivered by the source then (C) reduce the voltage profile
(A) P = 27.78 kW, Q = 1.474 kVAR (D) improve the protection of the line
(B) P = 17.46 kW, Q = 10 kVAR Q.25 Assertion (A) : It is not necessarily desirable to
(C) P = 27.78 kW, Q = 10 kVAR compensate by a series capacitance for all the line
(D) P = 10 kW, Q = 1.474 kVAR reactance. [IES 2011]
Q.21 Shunt reactors are sometimes used in high voltage Reason (R) : Power can be transformed only if
transmission systems to [GATE 2014-Kharagpur] reactance is present.
(A) limit the short circuit current through the line. (A) Both A and R are individually true and R is
(B) compensate for the series reactance of the line the correct explanation of A
under heavily loaded condition. (B) Both A and R are individually true but R is
(C) limit overvoltages at the load side under NOT the correct explanation of A
lightly loaded condition. (C) A is true but R is false
(D) compensate for the voltage drop in the line
(D) A is false but R is true
under heavily loaded condition.
Q.26 Shunt compensation in an EHV line is used to
Q.22 For enhancing the power transmission in a long
improve [IES 2000]
EHV transmission line, the most preferred method
is to connect a [GATE 2011-Madras] (A) stability and fault level

(A) series inductive compensator in the line (B) fault level and voltage profile

(B) shunt inductive compensator at the receiving (C) voltage profile and stability
end (D) stability, fault level and voltage profile
(C) series capacitive compensator in the line
(D) shunt capacitive compensator at the sending
end
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 38 GATE ACADEMY®

Answer Keys

Objective & Numerical Answer Type Questions

1. C 2. C 3. 0.75 4. B 5. B
6. A 7. B 8. D 9. D 10. -11.5
11. -11.4 12. 200 13. D 14. A 15. B
16. A 17. B 18. C 19. A 20. B
21. * 22. B 23. 23.63 24. 7 25. D
26. C 27. B 28. B 29. B 30. 0.135
Practice (Objective & Numerical Answer) Questions
1. 69.13 2. C 3. * 4. D 5. A
6. 1153.4 7. A 8. * 9. A 10. D
11. B 12. C 13. A 14. C 15. B
16. D 17. A 18. 0.316 19. 221.7 20. C
21. A 22. A 23. C 24. C 25. B
26. B 27. B 28. C

21. (1) 273.5 MVA

(2) 1174 A
(3) 468 MVA
3. (1) 1372 VAR, (2) 16.6 A
8. (1) 7.29 kVAR, (2) 1.274


 6 Distribution
System

Objective & Numerical Ans Type Questions : Q.5 A two wire dc distributor system is 3 km long and
it supplies loads of 200 A, 100 A, 75 A and 50 A at
Q.1 The selection of size of conductors for a distributor
800 m, 1200 m, 2000 m and 3000 m from the
in a distribution system is governed by
feeding point. Each conductor has go and return
[GATE 1995-Kanpur, GATE 1992-Delhi] resistance of 0.004 Ω per 100 m. If voltage at
(A) corona loss (B) temperature rise feeding point is 250 V, the voltage at each load
(C) radio interference (D) voltage drop point are
Q.2 Why is a ring main distribution system preferred (A) 236.4 V, 232.8 V, 228.8 V, 226.8 V
to a radial system? [IES 2007] (B) 239.4 V, 234.8 V, 230.8 V, 226.8 V
1. Voltage drop in the feeder is less (C) 239.4 V, 232.8 V, 230.8 V, 224.8 V
2. Power factor is higher (D) 236.4 V, 234.8 V, 228.8 V, 224.8 V
3. Supply is more reliable Q.6 Two tram cars A and B, 2 km and 6 km away from
Select the correct answer using the codes given a substation draws 40 A and 20 A respectively.
below : The substation voltage is 600 V d.c. The resistance
(A) 1 and 2 only (B) 2 and 3 only of trolley wire is 0.25 Ω/km and that of track is

(C) 1 and 3 only (D) 1, 2 and 3 0.03 Ω /km . The voltage across each tram car are

Q.3 A distribution transformer usually is a 2 km 4 km

(A) Star star transformer
(B) Delta delta transformer
600 V 40 A 20 A
(C) Star delta transformer
(D) Delta star transformer
Q.4 The fundamental difference between a feeder and (A) 560.4 V, 544 V (B) 566.4 V, 544 V
a transmission line is (C) 566.4 V, 540 V (D) 560.4 V, 540 V
(A) transmission line is shorter and operates at Q.7 The distribution system shown has equi-spaced
lesser voltage than feeder loads with equal resistance r in each section of the
(B) transmission line is shorter and operates at conductor. There is no current flow after H and
more voltage than feeder the maximum voltage drop is 7 V.
(C) transmission line is longer and operates at
lower voltage than feeder
(D) transmission line is longer and operates at
more voltage than feeder The power loss in the distributor is _____ W.
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 40 GATE ACADEMY®
Q.8 A distribution feeder of 1 km length having A C D B
resistance, but negligible reactance, is fed from 0.02 W 0.04 W 0.03W
both the ends by 400 V, 50 Hz balanced sources.
Both voltage sources S 1 and S 2 are in phase. The 100 A 120 A

feeder supplies concentrated loads of unity power (A) 153.33 A, 53.33 A, 66.67 A
factor as shown in the figure. (B) 163.33 A, 63.33 A, 56.67 A
400 m 200 m 200 m 200 m
S1 S2 (C) 173.33 A, 73.33 A, 46.67 A
P
(D) 183.33 A, 83.33 A, 36.67 A
400 V 400 V
50 Hz 50 Hz Q.12 A two wire dc distributor fed at both ends ‘A’ and
200 A 100 A 200 A
The contributions of S 1 and S 2 in 100 A current ‘B’ at 255 V and 250 V respectively. The loads and
resistances of distributor (both wires) are shown.
supplied at location P respectively, are
[GATE 2014-Kharagpur] IA 0.02 W 0.05W 0.03W
IB
(A) 75 A and 25 A (B) 50 A and 50 A A C D B
(C) 25 A and 75 A (D) 0 A and 100 A
Q.9 A dc distribution system is shown in figure with 100 A 180 A
load currents as marked. The two ends of the
Determine :
feeder are fed by voltage sources such that
(1) the currents fed at A and B.
VP − VQ = 3 V. The value of the voltage V p for a
(2) the voltages at points C and D.
minimum voltage of 220 V at any point along the
Q.13 A 2 wire dc distributer AB, 600 m long is loaded as
feeder is [GATE 2003-Madras]
shown. Each conductor has a resistance of 0.01 Ω
per 100 m.

(A) 225.89 V (B) 222.89 V Calculate :

(C) 220.0 V (D) 228.58 V (1) the current supplied from A and B.
Q.10 A two conductor cable 1 km long is loaded as (2) the power dissipated in the distributor.
shown. Both ends are supplied at 250 V. If the Q.14 A 2 wire dc distributor 300 m long is uniformly
minimum allowable voltage to the consumer is loaded with a load of 1 A/m. The resistance of
245 V, calculate the cross section of each single wire is 0.4 Ω /km . The distributor is fed at
conductor. The resistivity of the material is one end. Calculate :
1.7 μΩ -cm
(1) the voltage drop upto a distance of 225 m
from the feeding point.
(2) the maximum voltage drop.
(3) the voltages at a distance of 225 m and 300 m
(A) 0.17 cm2 (B) 1.7 cm 2 from the feeding point if the distributor is fed
2 2
(C) 0.085 cm (D) 0.85 cm at 300 V.
Q.11 A two wire distributor AB is fed at A and B at 250 (4) the power loss in the distributor.
V and 245 V respectively and is loaded as shown Q.15 A 250 m, 2 wire d.c. distributor fed from one end
in figure. The resistances given are those for both is loaded uniformly at the rate of 1.6 A/m. The
conductors. Find the value of current in each resistance of each conductor is 0.0002 Ω per
section. meter. Calculate :
GATE ACADEMY® 41 Distribution System
(1) the voltage necessary at feed point to maintain Calculate :
250 V at the far end. (1) the value of minimum potential.
(2) the voltage necessary at feed point to maintain (2) the currents supplied by A and B.
250 V at the midpoint of the distributor. Q.7 A 2 wire distributor is uniformly loaded at the rate
1.2 A/m and is fed at both the ends. The point of
Practice (objective & Num Ans) Questions : minimum potential occurs at 575 m from end A
Q.1 Calculate the voltage at a distance of 250 m of a and the minimum potential is 225 V. If the length
350 m long distributor uniformly loaded at the of the distributor is 1 km, calculate the voltages at
rate of 0.8 A/m. The distributor is fed at one end at the feeding ends A and B. The resistance of each
250 V. The go and return resistance of the conductor is 0.04 Ω /km .
distributor is 0.00016 Ω/m . Also find the power (A) 220.87 V, 253.67 V (B) 230.87 V, 243.67 V
loss in the distributor. (C) 240.47 V, 233.67 V (D) None of these
Statement for Linked Questions 8 to 10
(A) 7.2 V, 1.46 kW (B) 242.8 V, 1.46 kW
A distributor 500 m long has a total resistance of
(C) 3.2 V, 1.86 kW (D) 246.8 V, 1.86 kW
0.05 Ω both go and return path. The distributor is
Q.2 A 2 wire dc distributor AB 900 m long is fed at A
loaded with concentrated loads of 80 A, 70 A, 50 A
400 V and load of 50 A, 100 A and 150 A are
and 100 A at a distance of 100 m, 200 m, 250 m,
tapped off from C, D and E which are at a distance
400 m, from feeding end A respectively. In
of 200 m, 500 m and 800 m from point A
addition to this there is uniformly distributed load
respectively. The distributor is also loaded
of 0.5 A/m on the distributor. Both ends A and B
uniformly at the rate of 0.5 A/m. If the resistance are maintained at 220 V.
of the distributor per meter is 0.000152, the voltage Q.8 Calculate the point of minimum potential from
at point B is ____ V. end A.
Q.3 A uniformly loaded distributor fed at one end (A) 100 m (B) 200 m
only has power loss of x watts, if the distributor is (C) 250 m (D) 400 m
now fed from both ends the power loss becomes Q.9 Calculate the current supplied by each end.
(A) x / 2 (B) x / 4 (A) 151 A, 149 A (B) 276 A, 274 A
(C) 401 A, 399 A (D) 451 A, 449 A
(C) x / 8 (D) x / 3
Q.10 Calculate the value of minimum potential.
Q.4 A uniformly distributed dc two wire distributor (A) 212.2 V (B) 214.8 V
300 m long is loaded at 2 A/m. Go and return (C) 216.2 V (D) 217.8 V
resistance of the loop is 0.05 Ω/km . If the Q.11 Single line diagram of a four bus single source
distributor is fed at both ends at the same voltage, distribution system is shown below. Branches
the maximum voltage drop is _____ V. e1 , e2 , e3 and e 4 have equal impedances. The load
Q.5 A distributor cable 800 m long is loaded with 0.4 current values indicated in the figure are in per
A/m. Resistance of each conductor is 0.04 Ω /km . unit. Distribution company’s policy required
Calculate the maximum voltage drop and the radial system operation with minimum loss. This
minimum voltage if the distributor is fed from can be achieved by operating of the branch
both ends with equal voltage of 220 V. [GATE 2008-Bangalore]

(A) 1.28 V, 218.72 V (B) 1.92 V, 218.08 V

(C) 2.56 V, 217.44 V (D) 2.56 V, 218.08 V
Q.6 A two wire dc distributor AB is 600 m long and is
fed from both ends. It is uniformly distributed at
the rate 1 A/m. The feeding point A is maintained
at 260 V while the feeding point B is maintained at
255 V. Resistance of each conductor is 0.1 Ω /km .
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 42 GATE ACADEMY®
(A) e1 (B) e2 Q.16 Three loads ABC are connected to 240 V supply

(C) e3 (D) e4 through separate cables having resistance of 0.06,

0.15 and 0.12 Ω respectively. A is joined with B
Q.12 A single phase AC distributor supplies two single
through 0.08 Ω connector and B is joined with C
phase loads as shown in figure. The voltage drop
through a connector of resistance 0.05 Ω .
from A to C is [GATE 1999-Bombay]
Determine the voltage at point A, B and C if the
loads are 40 A, 60 A and 25 A at load points A, B
and C.

I
(A) 4.5 V (B) 31.5 V
(C) 30 V (D) 20 V I1 I3
I2
Q.13 A single phase ac distributor XY 200 m long is fed
from end X and is loaded as under
A B C
(1) 50 A at 0.8 pf lagging 100 m from point X
(2) 100 A at 0.707 pf lagging 200 m from point X
40 A 60 A 25 A
The total resistance and reactance of the
0.3 Ω 0.2 Ω (A) 236.5 V, 234.1 V, 233.7 V
distribution is and per km.
Calculate the total voltage drop in the distributor. (B) 235.5 V, 234.1 V, 234.7 V

(A) 6 V (B) 9 V (C) 236.5 V, 235.1 V, 235.7 V

(C) 12 V (D) 18 V (D) 237.5 V, 236.1 V, 235.7 V

Q.14 A single phase distributor AB has a total

impedance of (0.1 + j 0.2) Ω . At the far end B, a
current of 80 A at 0.8 pf lagging and at mid point
C a current of 100 A at 0.6 pf lagging are tapped.
The voltage at the far end is maintained at 200 V.
The load pf are wrt the voltage at the far end. The
supply end voltage V A

(A) 220.2∠3.50 V (B) 223.2∠2.50 V

(C) 225.2∠3.50 V (D) 227.2∠2.50 V

Q.15 A single phase ring distributor A B C is shown.

Both power factor expressed are referred to the
voltage at point A. The current in section BC is
__________.
 GATE ACADEMY® 43 Distribution System

Answer Keys

Objective & Numerical Answer Type Questions

1. D 2. D 3. D 4. D 5. A
6. B 7. 1517.4 8. D 9. A 10. B
11. C 12. * 13. * 14. * 15. *
Practice (Objective & Numerical Answer) Questions
1. B 2. 341.86 3. B 4. 1.125 5. C
6. * 7. C 8. C 9. B 10. C
11. D 12. C 13. B 14. D 15. 7.6
16. C

12. (1) 184 A, 96 A (2) 251.32 V, 247.12 V

13. (1) 437.5 A, 412.5 A (2) 14.7 kW
14. (1) 33.75 V (2) 36 V
(3) 266.25 V, 264 V (4) 7.2 kW
15. (1) 270 V (2) 265 V
6. (1) 248.33 V (2) 341.67 A, 258.33 A


 7 Cables & Insulators

Objective & Numerical Ans Type Questions : Q.7 A single core underground cable has a copper
conductor of diameter 1.2 cm and resistivity
Q.1 The insulation resistance of a cable of length 10 km 1.72 × 10−8 Ω-m , a sheath of internal diameter 2 cm,
is 1 MΩ . For a length of 100 km of the same cable,
and a dielectric material of resistivity
the insulation resistance will be 12
5.8 × 10 Ω -m and relative permittivity 4. The
[GATE 1995-Kanpur]
length of the cable is 5 km. The conductor
(A) 1 M Ω (B) 10 M Ω resistance and the insulation resistance
(C) 0.1 M Ω (D) 0.01 M Ω respectively are :
Q.2 The rated load of an underground cable is always (A) 0.76 Ω , 94.3 MΩ (B) 1.76 Ω , 84.3 MΩ
________its natural load. [GATE 1995- (C) 2.76 Ω , 74.3 MΩ (D) 3.76 Ω , 64.3 MΩ
Kanpur]
Common Data for Question 8 & 9
Q.3 The insulation resistance of a single core cable is
Two underground cables A and B, each has a
200 MΩ / km . The insulation resistance for 5 km conductor resistance of 0.6 Ω and 0.8 Ω
length is [ESE 1999] respectively while each has an insulation
(A) 40 MΩ (B) 1000 MΩ resistance of 600 MΩ and 400 MΩ respectively.
(C) 200 MΩ (D) 8 MΩ Q.8 Calculate the effective conductor and insulation

Q.4 The insulation resistance of cable of length 10 km resistance, if the cables are connected in series.

is 1 MΩ , its resistance for 50 km length will be (A) 1.4 Ω, 1000 MΩ (B) 1.4 Ω, 240 MΩ
_____ MΩ . (C) 0.3428 Ω, 1000 MΩ (D) 0.3428 Ω, 240 MΩ
Q.5 A single core cable 5 km long has an insulation Q.9 Calculate the effective conductor and insulation
resistance of 0.4 MΩ . The core diameter is 20 mm resistance, if the cables are connected in parallel.
and the diameter of the cable over the insulation is (A) 1.4 Ω, 1000 MΩ (B) 1.4 Ω, 240 MΩ
50 mm. Calculate the resistivity of the insulating
(C) 0.3428 Ω, 1000 MΩ (D) 0.3428 Ω, 240 MΩ
material.
Q.10 Calculate the charging current of a single core
(A) 11.7 × 109 Ω -m (B) 12.7 × 109 Ω -m
cable used on a 3 − φ , 50 Hz, 66 kV system. The
(C) 13.7 × 109 Ω -m (D) 14.7 × 109 Ω -m
cable is 1 km long having a core diameter of 10 cm
Q.6 The insulation resistance of a single core cable is and paper insulation of thickness 7 cm with
500 MΩ /km . If the core diameter is 2.6 cm and relative permittivity 4.
14
resistivity of insulation is 5 ×10 Ω-cm , the (A) 2.04 A (B) 3.04 A
insulation thickness is _____ cm. (C) 4.04 A (D) 5.04 A
 GATE ACADEMY® 45 Cable & Insulators
Q.11 A 33 kV, 50 Hz, 3 phase underground cable, 4 km Q.15 A 33 kV, single core cable has a conductor
long uses three single core cable. Each of the diameter of 1 cm and a sheath of inside diameter 4
conductors has a diameter of 2.5 cm and the radial cm. Find the maximum and minimum stress in the
thickness of insulation is 0.5 cm. The relative insulation.
permittivity of insulation is 3. The capacitance of (A) 47.6 kV/m, 11.9 kV/m
the cable per phase, the charging current per
(B) 57.6 kV/cm, 15.9 kV/cm
phase and total charging kVAR respectively are :
(C) 47.6 kV/cm, 11.9 kV/cm
(A) 2.98 μF, 13.8 A, 658.4 kVAR
(D) 57.6 kV/m, 15.9 kV/m
(B) 2.98 μF, 11.8 A, 678.4 kVAR
Q.16 The rms values of maximum and minimum
(C) 1.98 μF, 13.8 A, 658.4 kVAR stresses in the insulation of a single core cable are
(D) 1.98 μF, 11.8 A, 678.4 kVAR 50 kV/cm and 15 kV/cm respectively. The
conductor diameter is 1.8 cm. Calculate thickness
Q.12 A long wire composed of a smooth round
of insulation and working voltage.
conductor runs above and parallel to the ground
(A) 3 cm, 54.2 kV (B) 2.1 cm, 180.6 kV
(assumed to be a large conducting plane). A high
voltage exists between the conductor and the (C) 3 cm, 180.6 kV (D) 2.1 cm, 54.2 kV
ground. The maximum electric stress occurs at Q.17 Determine the economical core diameter of a
[GATE 2002-Bangalore] single core cable working on 22 kV, single phase
system. The maximum permissible stress in the
(A) the upper surface of the conductor
dielectric is not to exceed 33 kV/cm.
(B) the lower surface of the conductor
(A) 1.88 cm (B) 2.88 cm
(C) the ground surface
(C) 3.88 cm (D) 4.88 cm
(D) midway between the conductor and ground
Q.18 Find the internal sheath diameter for the most
Q.13 A 6.6 kV, 50 Hz, single core lead sheathed cable
economical size of a single core cable working on a
has the following data : [GATE 1999-
132 kV, three phase system, if a dielectric stress of
Bombay]
60 kV/cm can be allowed.
Conductor diameter : 1.5 cm
(A) 3.6 cm (B) 4.89 cm
Length : 4 km (C) 9.78 cm (D) None of these
Internal diameter of the sheath : 3 cm Q.20 Three insulating materials with breakdown
12
Resistivity of insulation : 1.3 × 10 Ω-m strengths of 250 kV/cm, 200 kV/cm and 150 kV/cm
and permittivity of 2.5, 3.0 and 3.5 are used in a
Relative permittivity of insulation : 3.5
single core cable. If the factor of safety for the
Calculate :
materials is 5, the location of the materials with
(1) the insulation resistance respect to the core of the cable will be
(2) the capacitance (A) 2.5, 3.0, 3.5 (B) 3.0, 2.5, 3.5
(3) the maximum electric stress in the insulation. (C) 3.0, 2.5, 4.0 (D) 2.5, 3.5, 3.0
Q.14 In underground cables, the electrostatic stress is Q.21 Three insulation materials with same maximum
(A) zero at the conductor as well as on the sheath working stress and permittivities 2.5, 3.0, 4.0 are
(B) minimum at the conductor surface and used in single core cable. The location of the
maximum at the sheath materials with respect to the core of the cable will
be
(C) maximum at the conductor surface and
minimum at the sheath (A) 2.5, 3.0, 4.0 (B) 4.0, 3.0, 2.5

(D) same at the conductor surface and sheath. (C) 3.0, 2.5, 4.0 (D) 4.0, 2.5, 3.0
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 46 GATE ACADEMY®
Q.22 The maximum and minimum electric field Practice (objective & Num Ans) Questions :
strengths respectively in the cable shown are
Q.1 A single core lead covered cable is to be designed
for 66 kV to earth. Its conductor radius is 0.5 cm
and its three materials A, B, C have relative
permittivity of 3.8, 2.5 and 4.2 with maximum
permissible stresses of 48, 30 and 40 kV/cm rms.
Determine the radius R1 and R3

V V
(A) ,
R2 ln( R1 / R2 ) R1 ln( R1 / R2 )

V V
(B) ,
R1 ln( R1 / R2 ) R2 ln( R1 / R2 )

V V
(C) ,
r ln( R1 / r ) R1 ln( R1 / r )
(A) 0.543 cm, 4.35 cm (B) 0.643 cm, 3.35 cm
V V
(D) , (C) 0.743 cm, 2.35 cm (D) None of these
R1 ln( R1 / r ) r ln( R1 / r )
Q.2 A conductor of 1 cm diameter passes centrally
Q.23 For a capacitance grading, let r2 = 2.5 cm, r1 = 1.75
through a porcelain cylinder of 2 cm internal
cm, r = 0.92 cm and the operating voltage is 13.2
diameter and 6 cm external diameter. The cylinder
kV. Calculate :
is surrounded by a tightly fitting metal sheath. εr
(1) The maximum electric field without of porcelain is 5 and the peak voltage gradient in
capacitance grading. air must not exceed 32 kV/cm. The peak safe
(2) The maximum electric field with capacitance working voltage is __________ kV.
grading.
Q.24 A single core cable has a conductor diameter of 3
cm, the diameter of the cable being 9 cm. The
cable is graded by using two dielectrics of relative
permittivity 5 and 4 with corresponding safe
working stress of 30 kV/cm and 20 kV/cm rms.
Calculate :
(1) The radial thickness of each insulation.
(2) The rms safe working voltage of cable. Common Data for Questions 3 & 4

Q.25 A 3− φ , 66 kV (rms) single core cable is graded by A cable has intersheath grading as shown. The
cable radii are R1 = 0.92 cm and R3 = 2.5 cm.
using two dielectrics of relative permittivity 5 and
3, thickness of each being 1 cm. The core diameter
is 2 cm. Determine the peak maximum stress in
the two dielectrics.
(A) 35.87 kV/cm, 30.8 kV/cm
(B) 35.87 kV/cm, 32.8 kV/cm
(C) 39.37 kV/cm, 30.8 kV/cm Q.3 The location of the intersheath is :
(D) 39.37 kV/cm, 32.8 kV/cm (A) 1.213 cm (B) 1.516 cm
(C) 1.892 cm (D) 2.300 cm
GATE ACADEMY® 47 Cable & Insulators
Q.4 The ratio of maximum electric field strength with (A) 2.0 A (B) 2.4 A
and without intersheath is : (C) 2.7 A (D) 3.5 A
(A) 0.428 (B) 0.559
Q.8 For the circuit shown in figure, the capacitance
(C) 0.617 (D) 0.755
measured between terminals B and Y will be
Q.5 A 66 kV concentric cable with two intersheaths has
a core diameter of 1.6 cm. A 3 mm thick dielectric [GATE 1999-Bombay]
material constitutes the three zones of insulation.
Determine the maximum stress in the inner and
outer layers if 20 kV is maintained across each of
the inner two layers.

(A) Cc + (Cs / 2) (B) Cs + (Cc / 2)

(C) (Cs + 3Cc ) / 2 (D) 3Cc + 2Cs

Q.9 The capacitance of the three core cable belted

(A) 78.5 kV/cm, 73.6 kV/cm between three cores bunched together and the
(B) 73.6 kV/cm, 95.7 kV/cm sheath is 10 μF and between conductor and other
(C) 78.5 kV/cm, 95.7 kV/cm two connected together to the sheath is 6 μF . The
(D) 73.6 kV/cm, 78.5 kV/cm
cable connected to a 11 kV, 50 Hz, three phase
Q.6 A single core cable of conductor diameter 2 cm
supply. Calculate :
and sheath diameter 5.3 cm is to be used on a 66
kV rms, 3−φ system. The intersheaths of (1) The capacitance to neutral.

diameter 3.1 cm and 4.2 cm are introduced (2) The total charging kVA.
between the core and lead sheath. If the maximum Q.10 The capacitance per km of a three wire cable are
stress in each layer is same, find the peak voltage 0.9 μF between the three bunched conductors and
on each intersheath.
the sheath, and 0.4 μF between one conductor and
(A) 36.96 kV, 18.86 kV (B) 34.96 kV, 16.86 kV
the other two connected to the sheath. Determine
(C) 32.96 kV, 14.86 kV (D) None of these
the line to ground capacitance of a 20 km length of
Q.7 Consider a three core, three phase, 50 Hz, 11 kV
this cable.
cable whose conductors are denoted as R, Y and B
in the figure. The inter phase capacitance between (A) 0.45 μF (B) 0.9 μF
each pair of conductors is 0.2 μF and the (C) 4.5 μF (D) 9 μF
capacitance between each line conductor and the
Q.11 The capacitance per km of a 3-phase belted cable is
sheath is 0.4 μF . The per phase charging current is
[GATE 2010-Guwahati] 0.18 μF between two cores with the third core
connected to sheath. The kVA taken by 20 km long
cable when connected to 3-phase, 50 Hz, 3300 V
supply is _____.
Q.12 A three-phase cable is supplying 800 kW and 600
kVAr to an inductive load. It is intended to supply
an additional resistive load of 100 kW through the
same cable without increasing the heat dissipation
in the cable, by providing a three-phase bank of
capacitors connected in star across the load. Given
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 48 GATE ACADEMY®
the line voltage is 3.3 kV, 50 Hz the capacitance
per phase of the bank expressed in microfarads, is
_______________. [GATE 2016 - Bangalore]
Q.13 A lossy capacitor C x rated for operation at 5 kV,
50 Hz is represented by an equivalent circuit with
an ideal capacitor C p in parallel with a resistor R p
. The value of C p is found to be 0.102 μF and the (A) e1 = 3.74 kV , e2 = 2.61 kV
value of RP = 1.25 MΩ . Then the power loss and (B) e1 = 3.46 kV , e2 = 2.89 kV
tan δ of the lossy capacitor operating at the rated (C) e1 = 6.0 kV , e2 = 4.23 kV
voltage, respectively, are [GATE 2011-Madras]
(D) e1 = 5.5 kV , e2 = 5.5 kV
(A) 10 W and 0.0002 (B) 10 W and 0.0025
Q.18 In a transmission line each conductor is at 20 kV
(C) 20 W and 0.025 (D) 20 W and 0.44
and is supported by a string of 3 suspension
Q.14 A 110 kV, single core coaxial XLPE insulated insulators. The air capacitance between each cap-
power cable delivering power at 50 Hz, has a pin junction and tower is one-fifth of the
capacitance of 125 nF/km. If the dielectric loss capacitance C of each insulation unit. A guard
−4
tangent of XLPE is 2 ×10 , then dielectric power ring, effective only over the line-end insulator unit
loss in this cable in W/km is [GATE 2004-Delhi] is fitted so that the voltages on the two units
(A) 5.0 (B) 31.7 nearest the line-end are equal.
(C) 37.8 (D) 189.0 [GATE 1999-Bombay]

Q.15 A single core cable, consisting of a 1 cm diameter (A) Calculate the voltage on the line-end unit.
core inside a 2.5 cm diameter sheath is 10 km long (B) Calculate the value of capacitance C x required.
and operates at 13.2 kV and 60 Hz. εr = 5 and
open circuit pf of the cable is 0.08. Calculate : C (C/5)
(1) The charging current through the cable.
(2) The line insulation resistance. Cx C (C/5)
(3) The dielectric loss.
Q.16 The undesirable property of an electrical C
insulating material is [GATE 2014-Kharagpur]
(A) high dielectric strength
Q.19 Each conductor of a 33 kV, three phase system is
(B) high relative permittivity
suspended by a string of three similar insulators.
(C) high thermal conductivity
The ratio of shunt capacitance to mutual
(D) high insulation resistivity capacitance is 0.1. Calculate the voltage across
Q.17 Consider a three phase, 50 Hz, 11 kV distribution each insulator and string efficiency.
system. Each of the conductors is suspended by an [GATE 1998-Delhi]
insulator string having two identical porcelain Q.20 Two insulator discs of identical capacitance value
insulators. The self capacitance of the insulator is 5 of C make up a string for a 22 kV, 50 Hz, single
times the shunt capacitance between the link and phase overhead line insulation system. If the pin
the ground, as shown in the figure. The voltage to earth capacitance is also C, then the string
across the two insulators are efficiency is [ESE 2003]
[GATE 2010-Guwahati] (A) 50% (B) 75%
(C) 90% (D) 86%
 GATE ACADEMY® 49 Cable & Insulators
Q.21 Determine the maximum voltage that the string of
the suspension insulators can withstand if the
maximum voltage per unit is 20 kV.

Q.22 Calculate the string efficiency.

(A) 62% (B) 72%
(A) 40 kV (B) 48.36 kV
(C) 82% (D) 92%
(C) 53.42 kV (D) 60 kV
Q.23 Calculate value of link pins to the line capacitance
Common Data For Questions 22 & 23
x and y for 100% string efficiency.
A 3 unit suspension insulator is shown in which (A) 1/4, 1/2 (B) 1/8, 1/4
the capacitance of the link pins to earth and the (C) 1/8, 1/2 (D) 1/2, 1/4
line are respectively 25% and 10% of capacitance
of each unit.
Answer Keys

Objective & Numerical Answer Type Questions

1. C 2. * 3. A 4. 0.2 5. C
6. 1.14 7. A 8. B 9. C 10. B
11. D 12. B 13. * 14. C 15. C
16. D 17. A 18. C 19. A 20. B
21. A 22. * 23. * 24. D 25. A
Practice (Objective & Numerical Answer) Questions
1. 14.6 2. B 3. D 4. C 5. A
6. A 7. C 8. * 9. D 10. 24.57
11. 48 12. C 13. B 14. * 15. C
16. B 17. * 18. 86.75% 19. B 20. B
21. C 22. C

2. Less than
13. 35.85 M Ω , 0.28 μF/km, 12.7 kV/cm
22. (1) 1435.3 kV/m (2) 1085.8 kV/m
23. (1) 1.3125 cm, 1.6875 cm (2) 54.725 kV

8. (1) 7.33 μF (2) 278.6 kVA

14. (1) 15 A (2) 10.9 kΩ
(3) 16 kW
17. 7.06 kV, 0.366C

 8 Per Unit System Analysis

Objective & Numerical Ans Type Questions :

Q.1 A three phase star-connected load is drawing
(B)
power at a voltage of 0.9 pu and 0.8 power
factor lagging. The three phase base power
and base current are 100 MVA and 437.38
A respectively. The line to line load voltage
in kV is __________.
(C)
[GATE 2014-Kharagpur]
Q.2 For the power system shown in the figure
below, the specifications of the components
are the following :
(D)
[GATE 2010-Guwahati]
G1: 25 kV, 100 MVA, X = 9%
Q.3 A generator is connected through a 20
G2: 25 kV, 100 MVA, X = 9% MVA, 13.8/138 kV step up transformer, to a
T1: 25 kV/220 kV, 90 MVA, X = 12% transmission line. At the receiving end of the
line a load is supplied through a step down
T2: 220kV/ 25 kV, 90 MVA, X = 12% transformer of 10 MVA, 138/69 kV rating.
Line1: 220 kV, X = 150 ohms A 0.72 pu load, evaluated on load side
transformer ratings as base values, is
supplied from the above system. For system
base values of 10 MVA and 69 kV in load
circuit, the value of the load (in per unit) in
Choose 25 kV as the base voltage at the generator circuit will be
generator G1, and 200 MVA as the MVA [GATE 2006-Kharagpur]
base. The impedance diagram is : (A) 36 (B) 1.44
(C) 0.72 (D) 0.18
Q.4 A 75 MVA, 10 kV synchronous generator
(A) has X d = 0.4 pu. The value (in pu) to a base
of 100 MVA, 11 kV is
[GATE 2001-Kanpur, ESE 2005]
GATE ACADEMY® 51 Per Unit System Analysis
(A) 0.578 (B) 0.279 2
new old SBnew  VBold 
(C) 0.412 (D) 0.44 (B) Z pu =Z pu  
SBold  VBnew 
Q.5 For given base voltage and base volt-
amperes, the per unit impedance value of an S Bnew  VBold 
(C) Z punew = Z puold  new 
element is x. What will be the per unit S Bold  VB 
impedance value of this element when the
S Bold  VBnew 
voltage and volt-ampere bases are both (D) Z punew = Z puold  old 
S Bnew  VB 
doubled? [GATE 2000-Kharagpur]
(A) 0.5 x (B) 2 x Practice (Objective & Num Ans) Questions :
(C) 4 x (D) x Q.1 For a given base voltage and base volt-amp,
Q.6 The synchronous reactance of a 200 MVA, the per-unit impedance value of an elements
10 kV, 3-phase, 50 Hz generator is 1 pu at is X . What will be the per-unit impedance
its own base. Its pu reactance at 100 MVA, value of this element when the voltage and
20 kV base will be [GATE 1997-Madras] volt-amp bases are both doubled?
(A) 0.125 pu (B) 0.25 pu [ESE 2002]
(C) 0.5 pu (D) 1 pu (A) 4 X (B) 2 X
Q.7 A 25 MVA, 33 kV transformer has a pu (C) X (D) 0.5 X
impedance of 0.9. The pu impedance at a
Q.2 The per-unit impedance of a circuit element
new base 50 MVA at 11 kV would be
is 0.15. If the base kV and base MVA are
[ESE 2016]
halved then the new value of the per-unit
(A) 10. 4 (B) 12.2
impedance of the circuit element will be
(C) 14.4 (D) 16.2
[ESE 2002]
Q.8 In a 3 phase, 5 kV, 5 MVA system, what is
(A) 0.075 (B) 0.15
the base impedance? [ESE 2008]
(C) 0.30 (D) 0.60
(A) 5 ohms (B) 50 ohms
(C) 500 ohms (D) 0.5ohms Q.3 A 3-phase 50 MVA 10 kV generator has
reactance of 0.2 ohm per phase. Hence the
Q.9 The direct axis reactance Xd of a
per unit value of the reactance on a base 100
synchronous generator is given as 0.4 pu MVA, 25 kV will be [ESE 2002]
based on the generator’s name plate rating
(A) 1.25 (B) 0.625
of 10 kV, 75 MVA, The base for calculation
is 11 kV, 100 MVA. What is the pu value of (C) 0.032 (D) 0.32
X d on the new base? [ESE 2005] Q.4 There generators rated 100 MVA, 11 kV
have an impedance of 0.15 pu each. If in the
(A) 0.279 (B) 0.578
same plant, these generators are being
(C) 0.412 (D) 0.44
replaced by a single equivalent generator,
old
Q.10 Z pu is the per unit impedance on the power the effective impedance of equivalent
base SBold and voltage base VBold . What generator will be [ESE 2001]
would be the per unit impedance on the new (A) 0.05 pu (B) 0.15 pu
power base S Bnew and voltage base VBnew ? (C) 0.25 pu (D) 0.45 pu
2 Q.5 If a 250 MVA, 11 kV/400 kV three-phase
new old SBold  VBnew  power transformer has leakage reactance of
(A) Z pu =Z pu   [ESE 2004]
SBnew  VBold  0.05 per unit on the base of 250 MVA and
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 52 GATE ACADEMY®
the primary voltage of 11 kV, then the actual (D) None of these
leakage reactance of the transformer referred Q.9 For the system shown, the generator voltage
to the secondary side of 400 kV is is _____ kV.
Resistive load
[ESE 2001] G
X L = 100 W /ph
(A) 0.8 Ω (B) 0.0032 Ω 75 MVA 50 MVA
R = 500 W
15 kV 15/220 kV
(C) 0.03125Ω (D) 32.0 Ω 0.75 pu 0.1 pu 210 kV
Q.6 The impedance per phase of 3-phase
Assume 100 MVA, 15 kV base in generator.
transmission line on a base of 100 MVA,
Q.10
100 kV is 2 pu. The value of this impedance
T1 T2
on a base of 400 MVA and 400 kV would be V1 V2
j150 W
[ESE 2000] G 60 MW
(A) 1.5 pu (B) 1.0 pu 0.9 p.f. lag
11/220 kV 220/66 kV
(C) 0.5 pu (D) 0.25 pu 100 MVA 100 MVA
Q.7 The per unit impedance of a synchronous 10% 8%

machine is 0.242. If the base voltage is A load of 60 MW at 0.9 p.f. lag is tapped
increased by 1.1 times, the per unit value from 66 kV substation, which is to be
will be [ESE 1997] maintained at 60 kV. The terminal voltage
(A) 0.266 (B) 0.242 of the synchronous machine is
(C) 0.220 (D) 0.200 _________kV.
Q.8 Consider 10 MVA and 110 kV as base Q.11
values, find the pu impedance of the 2 00 Ω G Load
load referred to 110 kV side and 11 kV side.
10 MVA 10 MVA
11 kV 11/3.3 kV
X = 5% X = 5%
The generator is supplying a load of 6 MW
at 0.6 lag p.f. at rated voltage. The steady
state stability limit of the system is
_________MW.
(A) 0.66 pu, 0.66 pu
(B) 0.66 pu, 0.066 pu
(C) 0.66 pu, 0.0066 pu

Answer Keys

Objective & Numerical Answer Type Questions

117 to
1. 2. B 3. * 4. D 5. A
120
6. A 7. D 8. A 9. D 10. B
Practice (Objective & Numerical Answer) Questions
1. D 2. C 3. C 4. A 5. D
6. C 7. D 8. A 9. 24.2 10. 12.25
11. 108.16


 9 Symmetrical Faults

Objective & Numerical Ans Type Questions : Q.3 Two power stations S1 and S2 are
Q.1 Five alternators each rated 5 MVA, 13.2 kV interconnected through a transmission line
of per unit (pu) reactance of 0.4. Station S1
with 25% of reactance on its own base are
connected in parallel to a busbar. The short- has one generator of pu reactance of 0.2, and
station S2 has two generators of pu
circuit level in MVA at the busbar is
_______. [GATE 2019-Madras] reactance 0.4 each.

Q.2 A 100 MVA generator with 10% reactance

and a 200 MVA generator with 8%
reactance (reactances on their own bases)
are connected as shown in figure. The fault
level on bus 1 is to be restricted to 1500
MVA. Assume 100 MVA as base.
[GATE 1991-IIT Madras]
100 MVA 200 MVA For a 3-phase symmetrical short circuit at
the middle of the transmission line (point F),
what is the change in the value of the
equivalent fault reactance, with one of the
10% 8% generators of S2 removed? [ESE 2007]

A B (A) 10% (B) 20%

X (C) 30% (D) 40%
Bus 1 Bus 2 Q.4 Four identical 100 MVA, 33 kV generators
C are operating in parallel, as shown, in two
bus bar sections, interconnected through a
Feeder 15% ON 100 MVA BASE
current limiting reactor of X pu reactance on
LOAD the generator base.
(1) The reactance of bus bar reactor X (in
pu) will be _______.
(2) Fault level of bus 2 (in MVA) will be
______.
(3) MVA rating of circuit breaker C for
fault at load will be ______.
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 54 GATE ACADEMY®
Each generator has a reactance of 0.2 pu. Q.8 A power system network with a capacity of
The value of the reactor X to limit a 100 MVA has a source impedance of 10% at
symmetrical short circuit (a-b-c) current a point. The fault level at that point is
through the circuit breaker to 1500 MVA is [ESE 1994]
[ESE 2003] (A) 10 MVA (B) 30 MVA
(A) 0.05 pu (B) 0.10 pu (C) 3000 MVA (D) 1000 MVA
(C) 0.15 pu (D) 0.20 pu
Q.9 In the figure shown, a three phase short
Q.5 The above diagram shows the layout of a circuit occurs at F. The fault current is
power station having two generators A and _______ Amp.
B, connected to the 11 kV buses which are,
also fed through two transformers C and D
from a 132 kV grid. The 11 kV buses are
interconnected through a reactor R.

Q.10 The short circuit MVA at the bus bars for a

power plant A is 1200 MVA and for another
plant B is 1000 MVA at 33 kV. If these two
are interconnected by a tie line with
reactance 1.2 Ω , determine the possible
short circuit MVA at both the plants.
The reactance of A, B, C, D and R are in pu (A) 1577 MVA, 1418 MVA
on a common MVA and kV base. All the
(B) 1677 MVA, 1518 MVA
generated voltages in A, B and grid are each
1.0 pu and assumed as in phase at the time (C) 1777 MVA, 1618 MVA
of fault. The steady state symmetrical fault (D) 1877 MVA, 1718 MVA
current for a 3 phase fault on the 11 kV Q.11 The estimated short circuit MVA at the bus
feeder is [ESE 2001] bar of a generating unit G1 is 1000 MVA
(A) 10 pu (B) 15 pu and the short circuit MVA at the bus bar of
(C) 20 pu (D) 25 pu another unit G2 is 500 MVA. They are
Q.6 Four alternators, each rated at 5 MVA, 11
interconnected through a 0.4 Ω reactance.
kV with 20% reactance are working in
The operating voltage is 11 kV. The
parallel. The short circuit level at bus bars is
maximum value of SC MVA is _________.
[ESE 1999]
(A) 6.25 MVA (B) 20 MVA Q.12 A generating station consist of two 100
MVA generators with 6% reactance each
(C) 25 MVA (D) 100 MVA
and one 150 MVA generator with 8%
Q.7 The bus bars of each of the two alternators
reactance. These generators are connected to
of 15% reactance each, are interconnected
a common bus bar from which load are
through tie bar reactors of 15% each. The
taken through a 50 MVA step up
equivalent impedance to fault current for a 3
transformer each having 5% reactance.
phase fault in any alternator bus bar will be
Calculate the rating of circuit breaker on
[ESE 1996]
(A) 7.5% (B) 10% (1) low voltage side.
(C) 11.25% (D) 15% (2) high voltage side.
GATE ACADEMY® 55 Symmetrical Faults
The plant is protected by a tie bar system.
Reactors are rated at 7500 kVA and 6%
reactance.

Determine the fault MVA

Q.13 A power plant has two generating units and
(1) when a short circuit occurs on one of
the circuit breakers having breaking capacity the sections of bus bars.
of 175 MVA. It is planned to extend the
(2) at F when reactors are not present.
system by connecting it to the grid through a
transformer. Calculate the reactance needed Q.16 In a tie bar system shown, a three phase
feeder is supplied from the bus bar of
in ohms for a reactor to be connected in the
generator A at a line voltage of 6.6 kV. The
bus bar section to prevent the circuit breaker feeder has a resistance of 0.06 Ω /phase and
from being overloaded if a short circuit an inductive reactance of 0.12 Ω /phase. The
occurs on any outgoing feeder connecting to reactors reactances are based upon the rating
it. The bus bar voltage is 3.3 kV. of the machine to which it is connected. The
maximum MVA that can be fed into a
symmetrical short circuit at the far end of
the feeder is ___________.

Q.14 The 33 kV bus bars of a station are in two

sections A and B separated by a reactor. A is
fed from four 10 MVA generator each
having 0.2 pu reactance and B is fed from
Q.17 Three 20 MVA generators, each with 0.15
the grid through a 50 MVA transformer of
pu reactance are connected through three
0.1 pu reactance. The CB have a capacity of reactors to a common bus bar. Each feeder
500 MVA. Find the reactor reactance in connected to the generator side of a reactor
ohms if a symmetrical short circuit occurs has 200 MVA circuit breaker. Determine the
on an outgoing feeder connected to it. minimum value of reactor reactance in p.u.
if the bus bar voltage is 11 kV.
s

0.15 0.15 0.15

F 200 MVA
X X X
Q.15 A power plant has three generating units
each rated at 7500 kVA unit 15% reactance.
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 56 GATE ACADEMY®
Q.18 For the configuration shown in figure, the pu. The series reactance to be included at the
breaker connecting a large system to bus 2 is fault point to limit the short circuit current to
initially open. The system 3-phase fault 5.00 pu is [ESE 1996]
level at bus 3 under this condition is not (A) 3.000 pu (B) 0.200 pu
known. After closing the system breaker, the (C) 0.125 pu (D) 0.075 pu
3-phase fault level at bus 1 was found to be Q.22 A three phase, 25 MVA, 11 kV alternator
5.0 pu. What will be the new 3-phase fault has internal reactance of 6%. The external
level at system bus 3 after the reactance per phase to be connected in series
interconnection? All per unit values are on with the alternator, so that the steady state
common bases. Prefault load currents are short circuit current does not exceed six
neglected and prefault voltages are assumed times the full load current, is ____ Ω .
to be 1.0 pu at all buses. Q.23 Calculate the short circuit MVA at F1 and
[GATE 2000-
F2
Kharagpur]

(A) 12.37 MVA, 12.37 MVA

Q.19 An isolated synchronous generator with (B) 32.43 MVA, 12.37 MVA
transient reactance equal to 0.1 pu on a 100 (C) 12.37 MVA, 32.43 MVA
MVA base is connected to the high voltage (D) 32.43 MVA, 32.43 MVA
bus through a step up transformer of Q.24 A synchronous generator feeds bus 1 of a
reactance 0.1 pu on a 100 MVA base. The system. A power network feeds bus 2 of the
fault level at the bus is [ESE 2000] system. Buses 1 and 2 are connected through
(A) 1000 MVA (B) 500 MVA a transformer and a transmission line. Per
(C) 100 MVA (D) 50 MVA unit reactance of generator is 0.25,
Q.20 The following figure shows the single line transformer is 0.12 and transmission line is
diagram of a power system with all 0.28. The power network can be represented
reactance marked in per unit (pu) on the by a generator with an unknown reactance in
same base : series with the generator on no load and with
[ESE 1997] 1 pu voltage at each bus. Under operating
condition, a three phase short circuit
occurring on bus 1 causes a current of 5 pu
to flow into the fault. The equivalent
reactance of the power network is ____ pu.
Q.25 In the figure shown below, two identical
The system is on no load when a 3 phase
synchronous motors are connected to the bus
fault occurs at F on the high voltage side of
of a large system through a short
the transformer T2 . The fault current will be
transmission line. The ratings of various
(A) − j 0.8187 pu (B) + j 0.8187 pu components are as following.
(C) − j 8.1871 pu (D) + j 8.1871 pu Motor (each) : 1 MVA, 440 V, 0.1 pu
Q.21 In a power system with negligible transient reactance
resistance, the fault current at a point is 8.00 Line : 0.05 Ω reactance
GATE ACADEMY® 57 Symmetrical Faults
Large system : Short circuit MVA at its bus Q.28 Two generators G1 and G2 rated 10 MVA,
at 440 V is 8 MVA 11 kV and 5 MVA, 11 kV respectively are
Large system connected to a 15 MVA, 11 Δ / 66 Y kV
Line transformer with 10% reactance. Both the
Motors
generators have subtransient reactance 20%.
Bus
Motor Bus Calculate the subtransient current in each
generator when a three phase fault occurs at
The motors are operating at 400 V. The
the HV side of the transformer assuming
short circuit current (symmetrical) fed into a
that there is no circulating current in the
three phase fault at motor bus will be (take
machine and 15 MVA, 11 kV base.
base MVA equal to 1 MVA)_________ kA.
(A) 2.22 pu, 1.11 pu (B) 3.33 pu, 2.22 pu
Q.26 Two synchronous motors having
subtransient reactance of 0.8 pu and 0.25 pu (C) 3.33 pu, 1.11 pu (D) None of these
on a base of 480 V, 2000 kVA are Q.29 In the system shown, the far end of the
connected to a bus. This motor is connected reactive transmission system consisting of
by a line having a reactance of 0.023 Ω to a 200 km long double circuit line is connected
bus of a power system with short circuit 9.6 to load from bus B. A 3−φ fault occurs at
MVA for a normal voltage of 480 V. When bus B. Select 75 MVA and 11 kV on LV
the voltage at the motor bus is 440 V, side and 132 kV on HV side as base values.
neglect load current, the initial symmetrical Determine the total fault current and the
rms current in a three phase fault at the fault current supplied by generator 1.
motor bus is ______ kAmp. 75 MVA
15% 11/132 kV
G1 A
200 km
75 MVA, 10% B

F
Q.27 Two generators are connected in parallel to 25 MVA, 8%
0.18 W /phase/km
the LV side of a 3 − φ, Δ − Y transformer. G2
Before a fault occurred, the voltage on the 25 MVA 11/132 kV
HV side of the transformer is 63 kV. The 10%
transformer is unloaded and there is no (A) 1322 A, 10850 A (B) 15872 A, 10850
circulating current between the generators. A
A 3−φ short circuit occurs on the HV side (C) 15872 A, 5022 A (D) None of these
of the transformer. Assume 90 MVA and 66 Q.30 In the power system network, each of the
kV base. Calculate : alternator G1 and G2 is rated at 125 MVA,
11 kV and has a subtransient reactance of
j0.21 pu. Each of the transformer is rated at
125 MVA, 11/132 kV and has a leakage
reactance of 0.06 pu.

(1) the subtransient fault current in pu.

(2) the subtransient current flowing into
fault from each generator in Amp.
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 58 GATE ACADEMY®
Calculate : With the network initially unloaded and line
(1) the fault MVA. voltage of 110 kV, a symmetrical short
(2) the fault current in pu and amp. circuit occurs at mid-point F of line L2 .
Q.2 The SC MVA to be interrupted by the circuit
Practice (Objective & Num Ans) Questions :
breakers A and B at the ends of line
Q.1 In the power system shown, load at bus 5 is respectively are
fed by generators at bus 1 and bus 4. The
(A) 122 MVA, 48 MVA
generators are rated at 100 MVA, 11 kV
(B) 132 MVA, 58 MVA
with subtransient reactance X = 20% . The
(C) 122 MVA, 58 MVA
transformers are rated each at 100 MVA,
11/112 kV and 112/11 kV and have (D) 132 MVA, 48 MVA
X = 8% . The lines have an inductance of 1 Q.3 The SC MVA to be interrupted by the circuit
mH/phase/km at 50 Hz. Line L1 is 100 km breaker A and B at the ends of the line if X
is eliminated are respectively
long while lines L2 and L3 are each of 50
(A) 136.95 MVA, 45.65 MVA
km in length. Find the fault current and
(B) 126.95 MVA, 55.65 MVA
MVA for a three phase fault at load bus.
(C) 136.95 MVA, 55.65 MVA
1 2 L1 3 4
(D) 126.95 MVA, 45.65 MVA
G1 G2
Q.4 In the circuit shown below, the switch is
L2 L3
closed at t = 0. The value of θ in degrees
5
which will give the maximum value of DC
Load offset of the current at the time of switching
(A) 1546 A, 394 MVA is [GATE 2019-Madras]
(B) 2546 A, 494 MVA R = 3.77Ω L = 10 mH
(C) 3546 A, 594 MVA t=0
(D) None of these v(t ) = 150sin(377t + q)
.Common Data For Questions 2 and 3.
For the 3- φ power network shown, the (A) – 30 (B) – 45
ratings of the various components are : (C) 90 (D) 60
G1 : 100 MVA, 0.3 pu Q.5 The rated voltage of a three phase power
G2 : 60 MVA, 0.18 pu system is given as [GATE 2004-Delhi]
(A) rms phase voltage
T1 , T2 , T3 , T4 : 50 MVA, 0.1 pu
(B) peak phase voltage
Reactor X : 0.2 pu on 100 MVA (C) rms line to line voltage
Lines : 80 Ω reactance (D) peak line to line voltage
Q.6 A transmission line of inductance 0.1 H and
resistance 5 Ω is suddenly short circuited at
t = 0 and V = 100sin (100 π t + 150 ) . Find
approximately the value of the first current
maximum.
(A) 5 A (B) 6 A
4
(C) 7 A (D) 8 A
GATE ACADEMY® 59 Symmetrical Faults
Q.7 A 50 MVA, 10 kV, 50 Hz, star-connected, 2. The maximum possible dc component
unloaded three-phase alternator has a in pu.
synchronous reactance of 1 p.u. and a sub- 3. The maximum value of instantaneous
transient reactance of 0.2 p.u. If a 3-phase current in pu.
short circuit occurs close to the generator 4. The maximum rms value of the
terminals, the ratio of initial and final values asymmetrical short circuit current in pu.
of the sinusoidal component of the short Q.11 A generator connected through a 5 cycle
circuit current is ________. circuit breaker to a transformer is rated 100
[GATE 2016-Bangalore] MVA, 18 kV, with reactance of
Q.8 A 3 phase generator rated at 110 MVA, 11 X d" = 19%, X d' = 26% and X d = 130% . It
kV is connected through circuit breakers to a is operating at no load and rated voltage
transformer. The generator is having direct when a three phase short circuit occurs
axis subtransient reactance X d" = 19% , between the breaker and the transformer.
transient reactance X d' = 26% and (1) Determine the sustained short circuit
synchronous reactance 130%. The generator current in the breaker.
is operating at no load and rated voltage (2) Determine the initial symmetrical rms
when a three phase short circuit fault occurs current in the breaker.
between the breakers and the transformer. (3) Determine the maximum possible dc
The magnitude of initial symmetrical rms component of the short circuit current
current in the breakers will be in the breaker.
[GATE 2004-Delhi] (4) Determine the momentary current
(A) 4.44 kA (B) 22.20 kA rating of the breaker.
(C) 30.39 kA (D) 38.45 kA (5) Calculate the current to be interrupted
and the interrupting MVA.
Q.9 Higher synchronous reactance is preferred in
(6) If the three phase transformer is rated
the present day alternators, because one can
100 MVA, 240 Y / 18 Δ kV, X = 10%
have [GATE 1999-Bombay]
and a three phase short circuit occurs on
(A) reduced sub-transient current
the HV side at rated voltage and no
(B) reduced harmonic currents
load, determine the initial symmetrical
(C) reduced transient currents rms current in the transformer windings
(D) higher voltage regulation with load on the HV side and in the line on the
Q.10 A 100 MVA, Y connected, 13.2 kV LV side.
synchronous generator is connected to a Q.12 Two motors having X d' = 0.3 pu and
13.2/132 kV, 100 MVA, Δ − Y transformer.
X d" = 0.2 pu based on their own ratings of 6
The generator has X d" = 0.1 pu,
MVA, 6.6 kV are supplied by a transformer
X d' = 0.25 pu, X d = 1.2 pu on a 100 MVA rated 15 MVA, 112 kV/ 6.6 kV and its
base, while the transformer reactance is 0.1 reactance is 0.18 pu. A three phase short
pu on the same base. The machine is circuit occurs at the terminals of one of the
operating on no load, at rated voltage when motors.
a three phase fault occurs at the HV
terminals of the transformer. Determine
1. The subtransient, transient and steady
state symmetrical fault currents in pu.
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 60 GATE ACADEMY®
Calculate : (4) the current to be interrupted by the
(1) the subtransient fault current. breaker B in five cycles.
(5) the symmetrical currents to be
(2) the subtransient current in breaker A.
interrupted by circuit breakers A and B
(3) the momentary current in breaker A.
for a fault at P.
Q.13 Consider the system shown in below figure. (6) the symmetrical currents to be
interrupted by circuit breakers A and B
M 5 MVA, 6.9 kV, 0.2 pu
G for a fault at Q.
25 MVA 25 MVA
M 5 MVA, 6.9 kV, 0.2 pu Q.15 A sustained three-phase fault occurs in the
13.8 kV 13.8 /6.9 kV power system shown in the figure. The
M 5 MVA, 6.9 kV, 0.2 pu
0.15 pu 0.1 pu current and voltage phasors during the fault
A M 5 MVA, 6.9 kV, 0.2 pu (on a common reference), after the natural
P
transients have died down, are also shown.
A 3 − φ fault occurs at the point P. Calculate Where is the fault located?
the subtransient current in the fault and the [GATE 2015-Kanpur]
Transmission
subtransient current in the breaker A. I1 Line I3
V1 V2
(A) 8 pu, 8 pu (B) 7 pu, 7 pu
(C) 8 pu, 7 pu (D) 7 pu, 8 pu
~ P
Q S
~
R Transmission
I2 I4
Q.14 A 25 MVA, 11 kV generator with Line

X d" = 20% is connected through a step up V2

transformer line, a leakage line and a step V1

down transformer to a bus that supplies
I3
three identical motors. Each motor has I2 I1
X d" = 25% and X d' = 30% on a base of 5
I4
MVA, 6.6 kV. The three phase rating of the
(A) Location P (B) Location Q
step up transformer is 25 MVA, 11/66 kV
(C) Location R (D) Location S
with a leakage reactance of 10% and that of
Q.16 Three phase to ground fault takes place at
step down transformer is 25 MVA, 66/6.6
locations F1 and F2 in the system shown in the
kV with a leakage reactance of 10%. The
figure. [GATE 2014-Kharagpur]
bus voltage at the motors is 6.6 kV, when a I F1 , I F2
three phase fault occurs at the point F.
Reactance of transmission line is 15% on a
base of 25 MVA, 66 kV. Assume that the
system is operating on no load when the V F1 , V F2
fault occurs. Calculate : If the fault takes place at location F1 , then
M the voltage and the current at bus A are VF 1
A Q 15%
G M and I F 1 respectively. If the fault takes place
P
11/66 kV, 10% 66/6.6 kV, 10% at location F2 , then the voltage and the
25 MVA 25 MVA M
B F current at bus A are VF 2 and IF 2
(1) the short circuit current in the fault. respectively. The correct statement about
(2) the subtransient current in the breaker voltages and currents during faults at F1 and
B. F2 is
(3) the momentary current in the breaker B.
GATE ACADEMY® 61 Symmetrical Faults
(A) VF 1 leads I F 1 and VF 2 leads I F 2 A three-phase fault occurs at the terminals
of the motor when the terminal voltage of
(B) VF 1 leads I F 1 and VF 2 lags I F 2
the generator is 0.9 pu and the output current
(C) VF 1 lags I F 1 and VF 2 leads I F 2 of the generator is 1.0 pu at 0.8 power factor
(D) VF 1 lags I F 1 and VF 2 lags I F 2 leading. Find the subtransient current (per
unit) in the fault, in the generator and in the
Q.17 A new generator having Eg = 1.4∠300 pu motor I g " and I m" respectively.
equal to (1.212 + j 0.70) pu and (A) I g " = (0.48 − j 3.24) pu,
synchronous reactance X of 1.0 pu on the
system base, is to be connected to a bus I m" = ( −1.03 − j 3.34) pu
having voltage Vt , in the existing power (B) I g " = (2.31 − j 0.34) pu,
system. This existing power system can be I m" = (−4.68 − j1.44) pu
represented by Thevenin’s voltage
0 (C) I g " = (2.31 − j 0.34) pu,
Eth = 0.9∠0 pu in series with Thevenin’s
impedance Z th = 0.25 ∠90 0 pu. The I m" = (3.34 − j1.03) pu

magnitude of the bus voltage Vt , of the (D) I g " = ( −0.09 + j 0.12) pu,
system in pu will be [GATE 2004-Delhi] I m" = (− 0.27 + j 0.36) pu
(A) 0.990 (B) 0.973 Q.21 A synchronous generator and motor are
(C) 0.963 (D) 0.900 rated 30 MVA, 13.2 kV and both have
Q.18 A 50 Hz alternator is rated 500 MVA, 20 subtransient reactance of 20%. The line
kV, with X d = 1 pu and X d" = 0.2 pu . It connecting them has reactance of 10% on
the base of the machine rating. The motor is
supplies a purely resistive load of 400 MW
drawing 20 MW at 0.8 p.f. lagging at
at 20 kV. The load is connected directly
terminal voltage of 12.8 kV when a
across the generator terminals when a
symmetrical 3 − φ fault occurs at the
symmetrical fault occurs at the load
terminals. The initial rms current in the midpoint of the transmission line. Find the
generator in per unit is subtransient current in the generator and
motor. Consider 30 MVA, 13.2 kV base
[GATE 2001-Kanpur]
(A) 4.57 pu, 3.86 pu (B) 4.92 pu, 3.51 pu
(A) 7.22 (B) 6.4
(C) 4.92 pu, 3.86 pu (D) 4.57 pu, 3.51 pu
(C) 3.22 (D) 2.2
Q.22 Consider the power system shown.
Q.19 A synchronous generator rated 500 kVA,
440 V, 0.1 pu subtransient reactance is
supplying a passive load of 400 kW at 0.8
lagging pf. Calculate the initial symmetrical
rms current in kA for a 3 − φ fault at
The motor is drawing 15 MW at 0.9 pf
generator terminals. leading and a terminal voltage of 3.1 kV
Q.20 A generator is connected to a synchronous when a symmetrical three phase fault occurs
motor through a transformer having a at the generator terminals. Calculate the
leakage reactance of 0.10 pu. The subtransient current in generator and motor.
subtransient reactance of the generator and Consider 11 kV and 25 MVA base at
motor are 0.15 pu and 0.35 pu respectively. generator.
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 62 GATE ACADEMY®
(A) 8.87 kA, 4.93 kA Q.24 The system shown in figure is delivering 50
(B) 4.07 kA, 8.75 kA MVA at 11 kV, 0.8 lagging p.f. into a bus
which may be regarded as infinite.
(C) 4.57 kA, 8.07 kA
T1 T2
(D) None of these Line F ¥
G A B
Q.23 In the above power system shown, the j12 W Bus
passive load of 50 MW at 0.5 lead p.f. is 60 MVA 80 MVA 80 MVA
12 kV 12/66 kV 66/12 kV
supplied at rated voltage. j0.35 pu j0.08 pu j0.08 pu
X = 2.18 W
G Calculate the symmetrical current that the
100 MVA 100 MVA 100 MVA 50 MW circuit breakers A and B will be called upon
11 kV 11/33 kV 33/3.3 kV 0.5 lead p.f. to interrupt in the event of a three phase
X = 10% X = 10% X = 10%
fault occurring at F near circuit breaker B.
Select 100 MVA, 12 kV as generator base.
(1) Find the generator terminal voltage. (A) 1.40 kA, 8.02 kA
(2) Find the symmetrical short circuit (B) 1.22 kA, 8.02 kA
current through generator for a 3- φ
(C) 1.40 kA, 9.17 kA
fault at load terminals.
(D) 1.22 kA, 9.17 kA
 GATE ACADEMY® 63 Symmetrical Faults

Answer Keys

Objective & Numerical Answer Type Questions

1. 100 2. * 3. B 4. B 5. B
6. D 7. C 8. D 9. 4330 10. B
11. 1189 12. * 13. 0.043 Ω 14. 1.46 Ω 15. *
16. 212 17. 0.15 18. 11.43 19. B 20. C
21. D 22. 0.518 23. B 24. 0.6 25. 26.96
26. 17 27. * 28. A 29. A 30. *
Practice (Objective & Numerical Answer) Questions
1. B 2. D 3. A 4. B 5. C
6. A 7. 5 8. C 9. C 10. *
11. * 12. * 13. C 14. * 15. B
16. C 17. B 18. B 19. 6.97 20. A
21. D 22. A 23. * 24. B

2. (1) 0.16 pu (2) 2885 MVA (3) 461.6 MVA

12. (1) 5208 MVA (2) 839 MVA
15. (1) 95 MVA (2) 150 MVA
27. (1) 2.73 pu (2) 8597 A, 4299 A
30. (1) 605 MVA (2) 4.83 pu, 2.64 kA

10. (1) 5, 2.86, 0.77 (2) 7.07 pu (3) 14.14 pu (4) 8.66 pu
11. (1) 2467 A (2) 16882 A (3) 23874 A (4) 27011 A
(5) 18570 A, 579 MVA (6) 829.6 A, 11060 A
12. (1) 12.54 kA (2) 9.91 kA (3) 15.86 kA
14. (1) 9229 A (2) 7480 A (3) 11967 A (4) 7578 A
(5) 2.385 kA, 1.75 kA (6) 4.37 kA, 1.093 kA
23. (1) 7.5 kV (2) 6.5 kA


10 Symmetrical Components

0 0
Objective & Numerical Ans Type Questions : (A) 5.78∠− 30 (B) 5.78∠90
Q.1 In an unbalanced three phase system, phase (C) 6.33∠90
0
(D) 10.0∠− 30
0

current I a = 1∠( − 900 ) pu, negative

Q.4 Symmetrical components are used in power
sequence current I b 2 = 4∠( − 1500 ) pu, zero system for the analysis of [ESE 2016]
sequence current I co = 3∠90 0 pu. The (A) Balanced 3-phase fault
magnitude of phase current I b in pu is (B) Unbalanced 3-phase fault
[GATE 2014-Kharagpur] (C) Normal power system under steady
(A) 1.00 (B) 7.81 condition
(C) 11.53 (D) 13.00 (D) Stability of system under disturbance
Q.2 The phase sequence of the 3-phase system
Q.5 The line currents of a 3-phase power supply
shown in figure is :
are [ESE 2011]
[GATE 2004-Delhi]
R I R = 3 + j5 A IY = 2 + j 2 A
I B = −2 − j1 A
Y
The zero sequence current will be :
B (A) 1 + j 2 A (B) 5 + j 7 A
(A) RYB (B) RBY
(C) 1 + j 4 A (D) −2 − j1 A
(C) BRY (D) YBR
Q.3 A 3-phase transmission line supplies Δ − Q.6 If Van1 = 50∠ 0 0 , Van2 = 20∠90 0 , Van0 = 10∠1800
connected load Z. The conductor ‘c’ of the Determine the voltages to neutral
line develops an open circuit fault as shown
in figure. The currents in the lines are as Van , Vbn and Vcn respectively.
shown on the diagram. The positive (A) 44.72 V, 74.69 V, 37.70 V
sequence current component in line ‘a’ will
be [GATE 2004-Delhi] (B) 44.72 V, 37.70 V, 74.69 V
I a = 10Ð00 (C) 14.91 V, 24.89 V, 11.57 V
a (D) 14.91 V, 11.57 V, 24.89 V
Z
Z Q.7 A single phase resistive load of 100 kVA is
I b = 10Ð180 0
connected across lines bc of a balanced
b
Z supply of 3 kV. Compute the symmetrical
Ic = 0
c components of the line currents.
GATE ACADEMY® 65 Symmetrical Components
(A) 19.23, 0, 19.23 (C)
1 1
Van1 = X ∠(θ1 − 30 0 ), Van 2 = Y ∠ (θ 2 + 300 )
(B) 19.23,19.23, 19.23 3 3
(C) 0, 19.23, 19.23 1 1
(D) Van1 = X ∠ (θ1 − 60 0 ), Van 2 = Y ∠(θ 2 − 60 0 )
(D) 19.23, 19.23, 0 3 3
Q.8 In a 3 phase system shown below, phase ‘a’ Q.10 The current of a single phase load drawn
is on no load and phase b and c are short from a 3-phase system, has : [ESE 2011]
circuited to ground. The following currents (A) Zero sequence component of current as
are given : zero
I b = 91.65∠160.90 A and (B) Negative sequence component of
I n = 60∠90 A0 current more than positive sequence
component.
Ia = 0
Ea (C) Positive, negative and zero sequence
components equal.
(D) Negative sequence component of
Ec Eb
current less than positive sequence
Ib
component
Ic Q.11 In a 3 phase system, the phasor sum of phase
In
current is zero. Then there will be no
Find the symmetrical component of current. (A) Positive sequence component
0 0
(A) I a 0 = 40∠90 A , I a1 = 60∠ − 90 A , (B) Negative sequence component
I a 2 = 20∠900 A (C) Zero sequence component
(D) None of the above.
(B) I a 0 = 20∠900 A , I a1 = 40∠90 0 A ,
Q.12 Choose the correct option from codes given
I a 2 = 60∠ − 900 A , below :
(C) I a 0 = 60∠ − 900 A , I a1 = 20∠90 0 A , (1 − a)2
1. 2
= 3∠ − 1800
I a 2 = 40∠900 A (1 + a)

(D) I a 0 = 20∠900 A , I a1 = 60∠ − 900 A , 2. (a − a 2 )(a 2 − a) = 3∠00

I a 2 = 40∠900 A 1 1
3. Van1 = Vbc ∠900 in star
3
Q.9 Three identical star connected resistors of
1.0 pu are connected to an unbalanced 3 1 2
4. Van2 = Vbc ∠ − 900 in star
phase supply. The load neutral is isolated. 3
The symmetrical components of the line (A) 1, 2, 3 (B) 1, 2, 4
voltages in pu are : (C) 2, 3, 4 (D) 1, 2, 3, 4
Vab1 = X ∠θ1 , Vab 2 = Y ∠θ2 . If all the pu
.Statement For Linked Questions 13 & 14.
calculations are with the respective base
The line to line voltage in a star connected
values, the phase to neutral sequence
un-balanced three phase supply are
voltages are [GATE 2006-Kharagpur]
Vab = 1000 ∠00 Vbc = 866.025∠ − 1500 and
(A) Van1 = X ∠(θ1 + 300 ), Van 2 = Y ∠(θ2 − 300 )
0 0
Vca = 500∠1200 .
(B) Van1 = X ∠(θ1 − 30 ), Van 2 = Y ∠(θ2 + 30 )
Power System Analysis 02 [Workbook] 66 GATE ACADEMY®
Q.13 Determine the positive and negative .Common Data For Questions 17 & 18
symmetrical components of line voltage. A delta connected resistive load is connected
0 0
(A) 763.76∠ −10.89 , 388.6∠29.99 across a balanced three phase supply of 400
V.
(B) 663.76∠ −10.890 , 288.6∠29.990 a
Ia a
0 0
(C) 763.76∠ −10.89 , 288.6∠29.99
15W 20 W
(D) 663.76∠ −10.890 , 388.6∠29.990
Q.14 Determine the positive and negative Ic c
c b
symmetrical components of phase voltage. 250 W
b
(A) 440.95∠ − 40.890 , 166.66∠600 Ib

(B) 440.95∠ − 40.890 , 266.66∠600 Q.17 Find the symmetrical components of delta
phase currents.
(C) 340.95∠ − 40.890 , 166.66∠600
(A) 7.5∠74.90 , 16.1∠300 , 7.5∠ − 74.90
(D) 340.95∠ − 40.890 , 266.66∠600
(B) 7.5∠ − 74.90 , 16.1∠00 , 7.5∠74.90
.Common Data For Questions 15 and 16.
(C) 7.5∠74.90 , 16.1∠00 , 7.5∠ − 74.90
A delta connected balanced resistive load is
connected across an unbalanced three phase (D) None of the above
supply as shown in figure with current in Q.18 Find the symmetrical component of delta
line A and B specified. line currents.
A
I A = 10Ð300 (A) 0, 27.87∠ − 300 , 13∠ − 44.90
R R (B) 0, 27.87∠300 , 13∠ − 44.90

I B = 15Ð - 60° (C) 0, 27.87∠300 , 13∠44.90

B
R (D) None of the above
C
IC Q.19 A 230 V (phase), 50 Hz, three phase, 4 wire,
system has a sequence ABC. A unity power
Q.15 Calculate the symmetrical currents in line A.
factor load of 4 kW is connected between
(A) 0, 14∠420 , 4.64∠ − 111.40 phase A and neutral N. It is desired to
(B) 0, 14∠ − 780 , 4.64∠8.60 achieve zero neutral current through the use
of a pure inductor and a pure capacitor in the
(C) 0, 4.64∠8.60 , 14∠ − 780
other two phases. The value of inductor and
(D) 0, 4.64∠ − 111.40 , 14∠420 capacitor is [GATE 2007-Kanpur]
Q.16 Calculate the symmetrical currents I AB1 and (A) 72.95 mH in phase C and 139.02 μF in
I AB 2 . phase B
(B) 72.95 mH in phase B and 139.02 μF in
(A) 2.67∠ − 141.40 , 8.08∠720 phase C
0 0
(B) 8.08∠ − 141.4 , 2.67∠72 (C) 42.12 mH in phase C and 240.79 μF in
(C) 2.67∠720 , 8.08∠ − 141.40 phase B
(D) 42.12 mH in phase B and 240.79 μF in
(D) 8.08∠720 , 2.67∠ − 141.40
phase C
GATE ACADEMY® 67 Symmetrical Components

Q.20 A set of 3 equal resistor, each of value Rx , Q.24 The series impedance matrix of a short
connected in star across RBY of given three-phase transmission line in phase
figure consumes the same power as the  Zs Zm Zm 
unbalanced delta connected load shown. The coordinates is  Z m Z s Z m  . If the
 
value of Rx is [GATE 1994-Kharagpur]  Z m Z m Z s 
positive sequence impedance is (1 + j 10) Ω
and the zero sequence is (4 + j 31) Ω , then
the imaginary part of Z m (in Ω ) is
_______. (up to 2 decimal places).
[GATE 2018-Guwahati]
(A) 100 Ω (B) 50 Ω Q.25 A source is supplying a load through a 2-
phase, 3-wire transmission system as shown
(C) 33.3 Ω (D) 25 Ω
in figure below. The instantaneous voltage
Q.21 In a single phase ac circuit, the per unit and current in phase-a are
instantaneous voltage is given by van = 220sin(100πt ) V and ia = 10sin(100πt ) A ,
v = V sin (ωt + 30 0 ) and the per unit
respectively. Similarly for phase-b, the
instantaneous current is given by
instantaneous voltage and current are
i = I sin(ωt − 300 ) . Hence the per unit value
vbn = 220cos(100πt ) V and ib = 10cos(100πt ) A ,
of reactive power is [ESE 2002]
respectively.
1 1
(A) (B) a ia a'
4 2
+
van ib
3 3 b b'
(C) (D) Source + Load
4 2
vbn
Q.22 The unbalanced set of line to neutral n– – n'

voltages in kV at a fault point in power

The total instantaneous power flowing from
system are given by
the source to the load is
Va = 7.5∠ − 300 Vb = 7.5∠ − 1500 Vc = 0
(A) 2200 W [GATE 2017-Roorkee]
Similarly, the currents in Amp are (B) 2200sin 2 (100πt ) W
I a = 2500∠ − 900 I b = 2500∠900 Ic = 0
(C) 4400 W
Determine the complex power. (D) 2200sin(100πt ) cos(100πt ) W
(A) 30476 kVA (B) 32476 kVA
Practice (Objective & Num Ans) Questions :
(C) 34476 kVA (D) 36476 kVA
Q.1 For a fully transposed transmission line
Q.23 The voltages at the terminals of a balanced
load consisting of three 20 Ω star [GATE 2014-Kharagpur]
(A) positive, negative and zero sequence
connected resistors are 200∠00 ,
impedances are equal.
100∠255.50 and 200∠1510 . Find the power (B) positive and negative sequence
expended in three 20 Ω resistors. impedances are equal.
(A) 750 W (B) 1000 W (C) zero and positive sequence impedances
(C) 1250 W (D) 1500 W are equal.
Power System Analysis 02 [Workbook] 68 GATE ACADEMY®
(D) negative and zero sequence impedances The above circuit shows a 3-phase system
are equal. having a balanced self inductive reactance of
Q.2 A 3-phase transmission line is shown in the X L per phase and a mutual reactance of X m
figure. Voltage drop across the transmission between pairs of phases. The line current are
line is given by the following equation
I a , Ib and I c , and they may be unbalanced.
[GATE 2008-Bangalore]
The series voltage-drop relations would be
 ΔVa   Z s Zm Zm   Ia 
 ΔV  =  Z Vaa ' = I a X L + Ib X m + I c X m
 b  m Zs Z m   I b 
 ΔVc   Z m Zm Z s   I c  Vbb ' = I a X m + Ib X L + I c X L
DVa Vcc ' = I a X m + Ib X m + I c X L
Ia
DVb The positive, negative and zero-sequence
Ib reactances X1 , X 2 , and X 0 respectively
DVc
would be [ESE 2003]
Ic
(A) ( X L − X m ), ( X L − X m ) and ( X L + 2 X m )
Shunt capacitance of the line can be
neglected. If the line has positive sequence (B) ( X L + X m ), ( X L − 2 X m ) and ( X L + 2 X m )
impedance of 15 Ω and zero sequence
(C) ( X L − 2 X m ), ( X L + X m ) and ( X L − X m )
impedance of 48 Ω , then the value of Zs
(D) ( X L + 2 X m ), ( X L + 2 X m ) and ( X L + X m )
and Z m will be
(A) Z s = 31.5 Ω, Z m = 16.5 Ω Q.5 If the phase conductors of a 3- φ line are
shielded magnetically (flux produced by one
(B) Z s = 26 Ω, Z m = 11 Ω
conductor does not linking with another),
(C) Z s = 16.5 Ω, Z m = 31.5 Ω the +ve sequence, –ve sequence, 0-sequence
(D) Z s = 11.5 Ω, Z m = 26 Ω impedance of line (neglect shunt
capacitance).
Q.3 The parameters of a transposed overhead
transmission line are given as : (A) Z1 = Z2 < Z0 (B) Z1 < Z2 < Z0
Self reactance xs = 0.4 Ω/km and Mutual (C) Z1 < Z2 = Z0 (D) Z1 = Z2 = Z0
reactance xm = 0.1 Ω/km .Common Data For Questions 6 to 9.
The positive sequence reactance x1 and zero A three phase unbalanced source with the
following phase to neutral voltages is
sequence reactance x0 , respectively, in
applied to the circuit shown.
Ω/km are [GATE 2005-Bombay]
(A) 0.3, 0.2 (B) 0.5, 0.2  200∠250 
 
(C) 0.5, 0.6 (D) 0.3, 0.6 Vabc = 100∠ − 1550 
Q.4 80∠1000 
 
Ia XL
a a' Ia Zs
Va
XL Xm Zm
Ib Xm b' Ib Zs
b Vb
Xm Zm Zm
XL Ic Zs
Ic c c' Vc
GATE ACADEMY® 69 Symmetrical Components
The load series impedance per phase is (D) R r
Z s = 8 + j 24 and the mutual impedance
between phase is Z m = j 4 . The load and
G
source neutral are solidly grounded.
Q.11 Consider the transformer connections in a
Q.6 Determine the symmetrical components of part of a power system shown in the figure.
voltage. The nature of transformer connections and
(A) 47.77, 112.78, 61.62 phase shifts are indicated for all but one
(B) 47.77, 61.62, 112.78 transformer.
(C) 61.62, 112.78, 47.77 ~
(D) 61.62, 47.77, 112.78 - 300
A
15 kV
Q.7 Determine the symmetrical components of
current. q B
300
(A) 5.23, 1.45, 2.86 (B) 1.45, 5.23, 2.86
(C) 1.45, 2.86, 5.23 (D) 5.23, 2.86, 1.45 00
400 kV 220 kV
Q.8 Calculate the load phase currents.
(A) 8.74, 3.02, 5.22 (B) 5.22, 3.02, 8.74 Autotransformer

(C) 8.74, 5.22, 3.02 (D) 5.22, 8.74, 3.02 Which of the following connections, and the
corresponding phase shift θ , should be used
Q.9 Calculate the power delivered to the load.
for the transformer between A and B ?
(A) 2205∠690 (B) 2305∠690 [GATE 2007-Kanpur]
(C) 2405∠690 (D) 2505∠690 (A) Star - Star (θ = 00 )
Q.10 The zero sequence circuit of the three phase
(B) Star - Delta (θ = −300 )
transformer shown in the figure is :
[GATE 2010-Guwahati] (C) Delta - Star (θ = 300 )
R r (D) Star - Zigzag (θ = 300 )
b Q.12
A c
Y
B y
(A) a
R r
C

B b
G
For ΔY transformer, connections and
(B) R r
terminal markings are shown in the above
figure. If 1 and 2 represents positive and
negative sequence, then the correct solution
G
in per unit values for VA1 and VA 2 is
(C) R r
[ESE 2010]
(A) jVa1 and − jVa 2 (B) Va1 and − jVa 2
G (C) jVa1 and −Va 2 (D) Va1 and −Va 2
Power System Analysis 02 [Workbook] 70 GATE ACADEMY®
Q.13 Match List-I with List-II and select the Q.16 Zero sequence currents can flow from a line
correct answer using the code given below into a transformer bank if the windings are
the lists : [ESE 2007] in [IES 1997]
List-I List-II R
A. A B 1. Z

s
0

Ref. Bus
B. A B 2.

s
Z0
B Y
Ref. Bus
C. A B 3. Z0 (A) grounded star-delta
(B) delta-star
Ref. Bus
Codes : A B C (C) star-grounded star
(A) 2 1 3 (D) delta-delta
(B) 2 3 1 Q.17 A three phase alternator generating
(C) 1 2 3 unbalanced voltages is connected to an
(D) 3 2 1 unbalanced load through a three phase
Q.14 A zero-sequence network of a 3-phase transmission line as shown in figure. The
transformer is given above. Z 0 is the zero neutral of the alternator and the star point of
sequence impedance of the transformer. the load are solidly grounded. The phase
What is the type of transformer connections? voltages of the alternator are Ea = 10∠00 V,
[ESE 2005] Eb = 10∠ − 900 V, Ec = 10∠1200 V. The
Z0
positive sequence component of the load
current is [GATE 2003-Madras]
Primary Secondary
j1.0 W j1.0 W
s

Reference Bus
(A) (B) j1.0 W j 2.0 W
s

(C) (D)

Q.15 A three-phase transformer having zero j1.0 W j 3.0 W

s

sequence impedance of Z 0 has the zero

(A) 1.310∠− 1070 A (B) 0.332∠ − 1200 A
sequence network as shown in the below
figure. The connections of its windings are (C) 0.996∠ − 1200 A (D) 3.510∠− 810 A
[ESE 2001]
Reference Bus
Q.18 When a generator has terminal ‘a’ open and
the other two terminals are connected to
Primary Secondary each other with a short circuit from this
Z0 connection to ground, typical values for the
symmetrical components of current in phase
(A) star-star
(B) delta-delta ‘a’ are I a1 = 600∠ − 900 , I a2 = 250∠900 and
(C) star-delta I a0 = 350∠900 A. Find the current into the
(D) delta-star with neural grounded ground and the current in phase ‘b’.
GATE ACADEMY® 71 Symmetrical Components

(A) 1050∠900 A, 904.16∠35.50 A j1.0 j1.0

(A)
(B) 1050∠900 A, 904.16∠144.50 A j 0.1 1 3 2 j 0.1

(C) 1050∠00 A, 904.16∠35.50 A

(D) 1050∠0 0 A, 904.16∠144.50 A
Q.19 A 2-bus system and corresponding zero j1.0 j1.0
sequence network are shown in the figure. (B)
j 0.25 1 3 2 j 0.10
[GATE 2014-Kharagpur]
Bus 1 T1 T2 Bus 2

X Gn X Mn
j 2.25 j 2.25
(a) (C)
j 0.10 1 3 2 j 0.10
X 0G X 0T 1 X 0L X 0T 2 X 0M

3 X Gn 3 X Mn

(b) j 2.25 j 2.25

(D)
The transformers T1 and T2 are connected as
j 0.25 1 3 2 j 0.10
(A) and D (B) and D

(C) D and D (D) D and

Q.21 In the above system, the three phase fault
Statement For Linked Questions 20 & 21 MVA at the bus 3 is
The generator units G1 and G2 are (A) 82.55 MVA (B) 85.11 MVA
connected by 15 kV line with a bus at the (C) 170.91 MVA (D) 181.82 MVA
mid-point as shown below. Q.22 A generator is connected to a transformer
[GATE 2011-Madras] which feeds another transformer through a
1 3 2 short feeder (see in figure). The zero
L1 L2
sequence impedance values are expressed in
10 km 10 km
G1 15 kV 15 kV G2 pu on a common base and are indicated in
G1 = 250 MVA, 15 kV, positive sequence figure. The Thevenin equivalent zero
sequence impedance at point B is
reactance X = 25% on its own base
[GATE 2002-Bangalore]
G2 = 100 MVA, 15 kV, positive sequence
reactance X = 10% on its own base
L1 and L2 = 10 km positive sequence
reactance X = 0.225 Ω/km
(A) 0.8 + j0.6 (B) 0.75 + j0.22
Q.20 For the above system, the positive sequence
diagram with the p.u. value on the 100 MVA (C) 0.75 + j0.25 (D) 1.5 + j0.25
common base is
Power System Analysis 02 [Workbook] 72 GATE ACADEMY®
Q.23 For the network shown in figure the zero
sequence reactance in p.u. are indicated. The
zero sequence driving reactance of the node
3 is [GATE 1998-Delhi]
1 2 3

~ ~
X g 0 = 0.1 X L 0 = 0.05 X g 0 = 0.2

X T 0 = 0.15

(A) 0.12 (B) 0.30

(C) 0.10 (D) 0.20
Answer Keys

Objective & Numerical Answer Type Questions

1. C 2. B 3. A 4. B 5. A
6. A 7. C 8. D 9. B 10. C
11. C 12. D 13. C 14. A 15. A
16. D 17. C 18. A 19. B 20. A
21. D 22. B 23. D 24. 7 25. A
Practice (Objective & Numerical Answer) Questions
1. B 2. B 3. D 4. A 5. D
6. A 7. B 8. C 9. D 10. C
11. A 12. A 13. A 14. B 15. B
16. A 17. D 18. B 19. B 20. A
21. D 22. B 23. C


 11 Unsymmetrical Faults

Objective & Numerical Ans Type Questions : does not exceed 3.75 pu if a single line to
ground fault occurs at the terminals is
Q.1 A 30 kV, 50 Hz, 50 MVA generator has the
_________(assume fault impedance to be
positive, negative, and zero sequence
zero). (Give the answer up to one decimal
reactances of 0.25 pu, 0.15 pu and 0.05 pu,
place). [GATE 2017-Roorkee]
respectively. The neutral of the generator is
grounded with a reactance so that the fault Q.4 Two identical unloaded generators are
current for a bolted LG fault and that of a connected in parallel as shown in the figure.
bolted three-phase fault at the generator Both the generators are having positive,
terminal are equal. The value of grounding negative and zero sequence impedance of
reactance in ohms (round off to one decimal j0.4 p.u, j0.3 p.u and j0.15 p.u, respectively.
place) is _______. [GATE 2019-Madras] If the fault voltage is 1 p.u, for a line-to-
ground (L-G) fault at the terminals of the
Q.2 The positive negative and zero sequence
generators, the fault current, in p.u is
impedances of a 125 MVA, three-phase,
_______. [GATE 2016-Bangalore]
15.5 kV, star-grounded, 50 Hz generator are
j 0.1pu , j 0.05 pu and j 0.01 pu
respectively on the machine rating base. The
machine is unloaded and working at the
rated terminal voltage. If the grounding
impedance of the generator is j 0.01 pu , Q.5 A three-phase 100 MVA, 25 kV, generator
then the magnitude of fault current for a b- has solidly grounded neutral. The positive,
phase to ground fault (in kA) is ________ negative, and the zero sequence reactance of
(up to 2 decimal places). the generator are 0.2 pu, 0.2 pu, and 0.05 pu,
[GATE 2018-Guwahati] respectively, at the machine base quantities.
If a bolted single phase to ground fault
Q.3 The positive, negative, and zero sequence
occurs at the terminal of the unloaded
reactances of a wye-connected synchronous
generator, the fault current in amperes
generator are 0.2 pu, 0.2 pu and 0.1 pu
immediately after the fault is ______.
respectively. The generator is on open
[GATE 2014-Kharagpur]
circuit with a terminal voltage of 1 pu. The
minimum value of the inductive reactance, .Statement for Linked Answer Questions 6 & 7.
in pu, required to be connected between At a 220 kV substation of a power system, it
neutral and ground so that the fault current is given that the three phase fault level is
Power System Analysis 02 [Workbook] 74 GATE ACADEMY®
4000 MVA and single line to ground fault Q.10 A single line to ground fault occurs on an
level is 5000 MVA Neglecting the resistance unloaded generator in phase a. Positive,
and the shunt susceptance of the system. negative and zero sequence impedances of
[GATE 2005-Bombay] the generator are j 0.25 pu, j 0.25 pu and
Q.6 The positive sequence driving point j 0.15 pu respectively. The generator
reactance at the bus is neutral is grounded through a reactance of
(A) 2.5 Ω (B) 4.033 Ω j 0.05 pu The prefault generator terminal
(C) 5.5 Ω (D) 12.1 Ω voltage is 1 pu. Determine the fault current
Q.7 The zero sequence driving point reactance at in pu. [GATE 2001-Kanpur]
the bus is Q.11 The severity of line-to-ground and three
(A) 2.2 Ω (B) 4.84 Ω phases faults at the terminals of an unloaded
(C) 18.18 Ω (D) 22.72 Ω synchronous generator is to be same. If the
terminal voltage is 1.0 pu and
Q.8 A 500 MVA, 50 Hz, 3-phase turbogenerator
Z1 = Z 2 = j 0.1 pu, Z 0 = j 0.05 pu for the
produces power at 22 kV. Generator is Y-
connected and its neutral is solidly alternator, then the required inductive
grounded. Its sequence reactances are reactance for neutral grounding is
X 1 = X 2 = 0.15 and X 0 = 0.05 pu . It is [GATE 2000-Kharagpur]
operating at rated voltage and disconnected (A) 0.0166 p.u. (B) 0.05 p.u.
from the rest of the system (no load). The (C) 0.1 p.u. (D) 0.15 p.u.
magnitude of the subtransient line current Q.12 For a fault at the terminals of a synchronous
for single line to ground fault at the generator, the fault current is maximum for a
generator terminal in pu will be (A) 3 - phase fault [GATE 1997-Madras]
[GATE 2004-Delhi] (B) 3 - phase to ground fault
(A) 2.851 (B) 3.333 (C) line-to-ground fault
(C) 6.667 (D) 8.553 (D) line-to-line fault
Q.9 A 20 MVA, 6.6 kV, 3-phase alternator is
Q.13 In case of single line to ground fault
connected to a 3-phase transmission line.
[ESE 2015]
The per unit positive sequence, negative
sequence and zero sequence impedances of (A) All sequence networks are connected in
the alternator are j0.1, j0.1 and j0.04 parallel
respectively. The neutral of the alternator is (B) All sequence networks are connected in
connected to ground through an inductive series
reactor of j0.05 p.u. The per unit positive, (C) Positive and negative sequence
negative and zero sequence impedances of networks are connected in parallel
the transmission line are j0.1, j0.1 and j0.3, (D) Zero and negative sequence networks
respectively. All per unit values are based on are connected in series
the machine ratings. A solid ground fault Q.14 The positive, negative and zero sequence per
occurs at one phase of the far end of the unit impedance of two generators connected
transmission line. The voltage of the in parallel are X 1 = 0.12, X 2 = 0.096 and
alternator neutral with respect to ground
X 0 = 0.036 pu. For a LG fault at generator
during the fault is [GATE 2003-Madras]
terminals (with 1 pu voltage) the positive
(A) 513.8 V (B) 889.9 V
sequence current will be) [ESE 2013]
(C) 1112.0 V (D) 642.2 V
GATE ACADEMY® 75 Unsymmetrical Faults
(A) 7.936 pu (B) 11.936 pu Q.20 The following figure shows a synchronous
(C) 10.936 pu (D) 8.936 pu generator whose neutral is solidly grounded.
Q.15 An unloaded generator with a prefault The generator has balanced emfs and
voltage 1 pu has the following sequence sequence reactances X 1 , X 2 and X 0 such
impedance : that X 1 = X 2  X 0 . Which of the following
Z 0 = j 0.15 pu, Z1 = Z 2 = j 0.25 pu is true?
The neutral is grounded with a reactance of a
0.05 pu. The fault current in pu for a single
line to ground fault is [ESE 2012] +
Ea
(A) 3.75 pu (B) 4.28 pu
(C) 6 pu (D) 7.25 pu + +
Ec Eb
Q.16 The zero sequence current of a generator for b
line to ground fault is j 2.4 pu . Then the c
current through the neutral during the fault (A) The LG fault current would be more
is [ESE 2003] than the three phase fault current.
(A) j 2.4 pu (B) j 0.8 pu (B) Both LG fault current and three phase
(C) j 7.2 pu (D) j 0.24 pu fault current are same.
Q.17 If the positive, negative and zero sequence (C) The three phase fault current is more
reactances of an element of a power system than the LG fault current.
are 0.3, 0.3 and 0.8 respectively, then the (D) None of the above
element would be a [ESE 2000] Q.21 A single line to ground fault occurs on an
(A) Synchronous Generator unloaded generator in phase ‘a’. Positive,
(B) Synchronous Motor negative and zero sequence reactance of the
(C) Static Load generator are 0.25 pu, 0.25 pu and 0.15 pu.
(D) Transmission Line The generator neutral is grounded through a
Q.18 A star connected 3-phase 11 kV, 25 MVA reactance of 0.05 pu. The prefault generator
alternator with its neutral grounded through terminal voltage is 1.0 pu. The positive
a 0.033 pu reactance (based on the alternator sequence sub-transient current in pu is
rating) has positive, negative and zero- __________.
sequence reactance of 0.2 pu, 0.1 pu and 0.1 Q.22 The neutral of a three-phase Y-connected
pu respectively. A single line to ground fault alternator is solidly grounded as shown in
on one of its terminals would result in a fault the figure. A single line-to-ground fault
current of [ESE 1999] occurs on the phase a and the current in this
(A) 150 MVA (B) 125 MVA phase is found to be 100 A. The positive
sequence component of current in phase b is
(C) 100 MVA (D) 50 MVA
100 A
Q.19 When a line-to-ground fault occurs, the a
current in a faulted phase is 100 A. The zero
sequence current in this case will be
[ESE 1997]
(A) Zero (B) 33.3 A
c b
(C) 66.6 A (D) 100 A
Power System Analysis 02 [Workbook] 76 GATE ACADEMY®

(A) 33.33∠120o A (B) 33.33∠240o A Q.26 A 3 − φ 10 MVA, 11 kV synchronous

(C) 100∠120o A (D) 100∠240o A generator with a solidly ground point supply
a feeder. The relevant impedance of
Q.23 A 10 MVA, 13.8 kV alternator has positive, generator and feeder are as follows :
negative and zero sequence reactance of
Generator Feeder
30%, 40%, and 5% respectively. What
Z1 j1.2 Ω j1 Ω
reactance/resistance must be put in the
generator neutral respectively so that the Z2 j 0.9 Ω j1 Ω
fault current for a line to ground fault will j 0.4 Ω j3 Ω
Z0
not exceed the rated current?
A fault from one phase to ground occurs at
(A) 15.28 Ω, 18.43 Ω
the far end of the feeder. Calculate
(B) 14.28 Ω, 18.43 Ω 1. The fault current.
(C) 14.28 Ω, 17.43 Ω 2. The voltage to neutral of the faulty
(D) 15.28 Ω, 17.43 Ω phase at the terminals of the generator.
Q.24 Find the positive and negative sequence Q.27 A 3 − φ , Y connected generator supplies a
reactance of the transmission line for a fault star connected inductive load. The neutral of
at bus 3, if positive sequence fault reactance load is solidly grounded and that of
is 0.3 pu and negative sequence fault generator is isolated. The load reactance per
reactance is 0.2 pu. phase is 0.5 pu. The zero sequence reactance
X 1 = X 2 = 0.1 X 1 = X 2 = 0.1 of load is 10% of the positive sequence
X 1 = 0.2 X 1 = 0.3
reactance. The transmission line reactance is
X 2 = 0.1 X 2 = 0.2 0.1 pu per phase. X g1 = X g 2 = j 0.5 pu ,
1 2 3 4
Transmission
line X g 0 = j 0.05 pu . An LG fault occurs
(A) X 1 = 0.4, X 2 = 0.4 midway in the line. The fault current, if the
(B) X 1 = 0.4, X 2 = 0.9 voltage at fault point is 1∠00 pu and zero
sequence reactance of line is 0.3 pu, is
(C) X 1 = 0.9, X 2 = 0.9 _____ pu.
(D) X 1 = 0.9, X 2 = 0.4 Q.28 A 25 MVA, 11 kV, 3 − φ , 50 Hz generator
Q.25 The reactance diagram of a portion of a has its neutral earthed through a 4% reactor.
power system is shown. The line to ground It is in parallel with another identical
source voltage is 1 pu and a line to ground generator having isolated neutral. Each
fault occurs at the point shown. Determine generator has X 1 = 16 % , X 2 = 8% and
the per unit currents in the two portions of X 0 = 12 % . The fault current for a single
transmission line B. line to ground fault in kA is _____.
Q.29 Three 6.6 kV, 12 MVA, 3 − φ alternators are
connected to a common set of bus bars. The
positive sequence reactance is 15%, negative
sequence reactance is 75% of positive
sequence value and zero sequence reactance
(A) 3.07 pu, 0.77 pu (B) 2.07 pu, 1.77 pu is 30% of the positive sequence value. An
earth fault occurs on one bus bar. Determine
(C) 1.07 pu, 2.77 pu (D) None of these
the fault current :
GATE ACADEMY® 77 Unsymmetrical Faults
(1) when all alternators neutrals are solidly
grounded.
(2) when one alternator neutral is solidly
earthed and others are isolated.
(3) when one alternator neutral is grounded Q.33 If the generator neutral is solidly grounded
through a resistance of 0.25 Ω and and fault impedance is zero then the value of
others are isolated. fault current will be
.Common Data for Questions 30 to 33. (A) 1.28 kA (B) 1.56 kA
Two 25 MVA, 11 kV synchronous (C) 1.12 kA (D) 3.74 kA
generators are connected to a common bus
Q.34 If the generator neutral is solidly grounded
bar which supplies a feeder. The star point and fault impedance is 0.1 pu on 50 MVA,
of one of the generators is grounded through
33 kV base, then fault current is
a resistance of 1 Ω , while that of the other
(A) 1076.44 A (B) 994.83 A
generator is isolated. A line to ground fault
(C) 1227.48 A (D) 1137.2 A
occurs at the far end of the feeder.
Generator Feeder Q.35 If the generator neutral is reactance
j 0.2 pu j 0.4 Ω /ph grounded with X n = 0.1 pu on 50 MVA, 33
X1
kV and fault impedance is 0.1 pu on 50
X2 j 0.15 pu j 0.4 Ω /ph
MVA, 33 kV, then fault current will be
X0 j 0.08 pu j 0.8 Ω /ph (A) 893.25 A (B) 1035.25 A
Q.30 Calculate the fault current in phase a. (C) 1082.11 A (D) 956.40 A
(A) 2.51 pu (B) 3.51 pu Q.36 A star connected synchronous generator
(C) 4.51 pu (D) None of these feeds bus bar 1 of a power system. Bus bar 1
Q.31 Determine the voltage to ground of the is connected to bus bar 2 through a star delta
sound phases of the feeder at the fault point. transformer in series with a transmission
(A) 0, 1.18 pu (B) 0, 1.67 pu line. The power network connected to bus
(C) 1.18 pu, 1.67 pu (D) None of these bar 2 can be equivalently represented by a
star connected generator with equal positive
Q.32 Calculate the voltage at the star point of the
and negative sequence reactance. All star
grounded generator wrt ground.
points are solidly connected to ground.
(A) 0.63 pu (B) 0.73 pu
(C) 0.83 pu (D) 0.93 pu Generator :
.Common Data for Questions 33 to 35. X 1 = 0.2 pu, X 2 = 0.15 pu, X 0 = 0.05 pu
Consider the power system shown in figure Transformer : X 1 = X 2 = X 0 = 0.12 pu
in which an SLG fault occurs at Bus-2 at the
Transmission line :
far end of the line. The specifications are
given as following X 1 = X 2 = 0.3 pu, X 0 = 0.5 pu

Component X1 X2 X0 Power network :

X 1 = X 2 = X pu, X 0 = 0.1 pu
50 MVA, 3 − φ
0.2 pu 0.2 pu 0.1 pu
Generator
33 kV Line 10 Ω 10 Ω 20 Ω
Power System Analysis 02 [Workbook] 78 GATE ACADEMY®
Under no load condition with 1 pu voltage at reactances 15%, 15% and 5% respectively.
each bus bar, a current of 4 pu is fed to a A reactance ( X n ) is connected between the
three phase short circuit on bus bar 2. neutral of the generator and ground. A
Determine double line to ground fault takes place
(1) the positive sequence reactance X of the involving phases ‘b’ and ‘c’, with a fault
power network. impedance of j0.1 p.u. The value of X n (in
(2) the fault current for LG fault on bus bar p.u.) that will limit the positive sequence
1. current to 4270 A is ___________.
Q.37 The positive, negative and zero sequence [GATE 2016-Bangalore]
impedances of a three phase generator are
Practice (Objective & Num Ans) Questions :
Z1 , Z 2 and Z 0 respectively. For a line-to-line
fault with fault impedance Z f , the fault Q.1 A double line to ground fault occurs on
generator terminal. Positive, negative and
current is I f 1 = kI f , where I f is the fault zero sequence reactance of the generator are
current with zero fault impedance. The 0.25 pu, 0.25 pu and 0.15 pu. The generator
relation between Z f and k is neutral is grounded through a reactance of
[GATE 2018-Guwahati] 0.05 pu. If the pre-fault generator terminal
voltage is 1 pu, the fault current is _____ pu.
( Z1 + Z 2 )(1 − k )
(A) Z f = Q.2 A synchronous machine 1 generating 1 pu
k
voltage is connected through a Y/Y
( Z1 + Z 2 )(1 + k )
(B) Z f = transformer of reactance 0.1 pu to two
k
transmission lines in parallel. The other ends
( Z1 + Z 2 ) k of the lines are connected through a Y/Y
(C) Z f =
1− k transformer of reactance 0.1 pu to a machine
( Z1 + Z 2 ) k 2 generating 1 pu voltage. The star points of
(D) Z f =
1+ k machine 1 and of the two transformers are
Q.38 Determine the magnitudes of the solidly grounded.
symmetrical components ( I R 0 , I R1 , I R 2 ) of Machine 1 : X 1 = 0.35 pu, X 2 = 0.25 pu,
the current in a three phase (RYB) three X 0 = 0.05 pu
wire system, when a short circuit occurs
between R and Y phase wires, the fault Machine 2 : X 1 = 0.30 pu, X 2 = 0.20 pu,
current being 100 A. X 0 = 0.04 pu
[GATE 1999-Bombay]
Each line : X 1 = X 2 = 0.40 pu, X 0 = 0.80 pu
Q.39 A 3-phase 3 wire system has a normal
voltage of 10.4 kV between the lines. It is
supplied by a generator having positive,
negative and zero sequence reactance of 0.6,
0.5 and 0.2 Ω per phase respectively. When
Calculate the current fed into a double line
a line to line fault occurs at the generator
to ground fault on the line side terminals of
terminal, the fault current is _____ A.
the transformer fed from machine 2.
Q.40 A 30 MVA 3-phase, 50 Hz, 13.8 kV, star-
(A) 0.66 pu (B) 1.88 pu
connected synchronous generator has
positive, negative and zero sequence (C) 2.00 pu (D) 2.55 pu
GATE ACADEMY® 79 Unsymmetrical Faults
Q.3 A 100 MVA, 18 kV turbo-generator having sequence currents and (0.56 + j 2.4) Ω to
X d" = X 1 = X 2 = 20 % and X 0 = 5% is zero sequence currents. The reactance of the
about to be connected to a power system. alternators to positive negative and zero
The generator has a current limiting reactor sequence currents are 0.48 Ω , 0.32 Ω and
of 0.162 Ω in the neutral. Before the 0.16 Ω . Both machines have their neutral
generator is connected to the system, its earthed through reactance of 0.16 Ω . An
voltage is adjusted to 16 kV when a double earth fault occurs simultaneously on two
line to ground fault develops at terminals b phases at the substation. Calculate :
and c. Find respectively the initial (1) the current through earth.
symmetrical rms current in the ground and
(2) the potential above earth obtained by
in line b.
the alternator neutrals.
(A) 7.135 kA, 14.27 kA
(B) 14.27 kA, 14.27 kA .Common Data for Questions 7 to 9.
(C) 14.27 kA, 7.135 kA Feeder F
G
(D) None of these
Q.4 A 3 − φ synchronous generator has positive,
negative and zero sequence reactance per The generator is operating at no-load at 1
phase of 1.0, 0.8 and 0.4 Ω respectively. pu. The total positive sequence impedance
The phase sequence of the generator is RYB upto fault point is 0.002+j0.02 pu. The
with a no load voltage of 11 kV between reference voltage for phase ‘a’ is defined as
lines. A short circuit occur between lines Y v (t ) = Vm sin(ωt + 200 ) . A symmetrical 3 − φ
and B and earth at the generator terminals. fault occurs at the far end of feeder at the
Calculate current in the earth return circuit instant t0 such that decaying DC offset is
1. if the generator neutral is solidly positive and maximum initial value. Assume
earthed. that the negative sequence impedances are
2. if the generator neutral is isolated. equal to positive sequence and zero
Q.5 Determine the fault currents in each phase sequence impedances are 2.5 times of
following a double line to ground short positive sequence impedances.
circuit at the terminals of a star connected
Q.7 The instant t0 of the fault is
synchronous generator operating initially on
an open circuit voltage of 1 pu. The positive, (A) 18.6 ms (B) 10.6 ms
negative and zero sequence reactance of the (C) 5.6 ms (D) 12.6 ms
generator are j 0.35 , j 0.25 and j 0.20 Q.8 The symmetrical short circuit current at F is
respectively and its star point is isolated
(A) −25 2 cos ωt
from ground.
(A) 0, 2.887 pu, 2.887 pu (B) 50 2 sin (ωt − 64.30 )
(B) 0, 2.887 pu, 3.756 pu
(C) 50 2 sin (ωt + 64.30 )
(C) 0, 3.756 pu, 3.756 pu
(D) None of these (D) 50sin (ωt + 84.30 )
Q.6 Two 11 kV, 40 MVA, 3-phase alternators Q.9 Instead of the 3 − φ fault, if a solid double
are connected in parallel and supply a line to ground fault occurs between phase b
substation feeder having an impedance of and c and ground, the symmetrical short
(0.32 + j 0.56) Ω to positive and negative circuit current fed into the fault is
Power System Analysis 02 [Workbook] 80 GATE ACADEMY®
(A) 28.6 pu (C) 15.23 pu Codes : A B C D
(C) 24.87 pu (D) 17.26 pu (A) 3 1 2 4
Q.10 The sequence components of the fault (B) 4 1 2 3
current are as follows : [GATE 2012-Delhi] (C) 3 2 1 4
I positive = j1.5 pu, I negative = − j 0.5 pu, (D) 4 2 1 3
I zero = − j1 pu Q.14 For the system shown in the diagram, what
The type of fault in the system is is a line-to-ground fault on the line side of
(A) LG (B) LL the transformer equivalent to? [ESE 2006]
(C) LLG (D) LLLG
F
Q.11 For an unbalanced fault, with paths for zero
sequence currents, at the point of fault
[GATE 1996-Bangalore] (A) A line to ground fault on the generator
(A) the negative and zero sequence voltages side of the transformer
are minimum (B) A line to line fault on the generator side
(B) the negative and zero sequence voltages of the transformer
are maximum (C) A double line to ground fault on the
(C) the negative sequence voltage is generator side of the transformer
minimum and zero sequence voltage is (D) A 3-phase fault on the generator side of
maximum the transformer
(D) the negative sequence voltage is Q.15 A fault occurring at the terminals of an
maximum and zero sequence voltage is unloaded synchronous generator operating at
minimum its rated voltage has resulted in the
Q.12 The three sequence voltages at the point of following values of currents and voltages
fault in power system are found to be equal. I a 0 = j 2.37 pu, I a1 = − j 3.05 pu, I a 2 = j 0.63 pu
The nature of the fault is [ESE 2016]
Va 0 = Va1 = Va 2 = 0.237 pu
(A) L - G (B) L - L - L
(C) L - L (D) L - L – G Which one of the following faults has
occurred? [ESE 2005]
Q.13 Match List-I with List-II and select the
correct answer using the codes given below (A) L – L fault (B) L – G fault
the lists : (C) L – L – G fault (D) L – L – L fault
List-I [ESE 2010] Q.16 If all the sequence voltages at the fault in a
A. All types of faults power system are equal, then the fault is a
B. All unsymmetrical faults (A) three-phase fault [ESE 2001]
C. Fault involving ground with neutral of (B) line to ground fault
the system grounded (C) line to line fault
D. Fault involving ground with floating (D) double line to ground fault
neutral Q.17 When a 50 MVA, 11 kV, 3-phase generator
List-II is subjected to a 3-phase fault, the fault
1. Negative sequence currents are present current is − j 5 pu . When it is subjected to a
2. Zero sequence currents are present line-to-line fault, the positive sequence
3. Zero sequence currents are absent current is − j 4 pu. The positive and negative
4. Positive sequence currents are present sequence reactances are respectively
GATE ACADEMY® 81 Unsymmetrical Faults
(A) j 0.2 and j 0.05 pu [ESE 1997] (C) X 1 = 0.3 pu, X 2 = 0.3 pu, X 0 = 0.7 pu
(B) j 0.2 and j 0.25 pu (D) X 1 = 0.75 pu, X 2 = 0.25 pu, X 0 = 0.50 pu
(C) j 0.25 and j 0.25 pu Q.22 A 25 MVA, 11 kV generator has a
(D) j 0.05 and j 0.05 pu X d" = 0.2 pu . Its negative and zero sequence
Q.18 The power system is subjected to a fault reactance are 0.3 pu and 0.1 pu. The neutral
which makes the zero sequence component of the generator is solidly grounded. Assume
of current equal to zero. The nature of fault that before the occurrence of the fault, the
is generator is operating at no load at rated
(A) Double line to ground fault voltage. Determine the subtransient line
(B) Double line fault current in the generator for
(C) Line to ground fault (1) LG fault
(D) Three phase to ground fault (2) LL fault
Q.19 The following sequence currents are (3) LLG fault
recorded in a power system under an
unbalanced condition.
.Common Data for Questions 23 to 28.
I a1 = − j1.653 p.u, I a 2 = j 0.5 p.u,
A 60 Hz turbo generator is rated 500 MVA,
I a 0 = j1.153 p.u 22 kV. It is star connected and solidly
Then identify the fault. grounded and is operating at rated voltage at
(A) Single line to ground fault (SLG) no load. It is disconnected from the rest of
(B) line to line fault the system. Its pu reactance are
(C) Double line to ground fault (LLG) X d" = X 1 = X 2 = 0.15 and X 0 = 0.05 .
(D) None of the above Q.23 Find the ratio of the subtransient line current
Q.20 In a power system it is observed that the for a single line to ground fault to the
magnitude of fault current for an LG fault is subtransient line current for a symmetrical
7.5 pu and for an LL fault is 8.66 pu. If the three phase fault.
prefault voltage at fault point is 1 pu, Z 0 of (A) 0.866 (B) 1.126
the system is _________ pu. (C) 1.286 (D) None of these
Q.21 A generator with zero resistance having 1.0 Q.24 Find the ratio of the subtransient line current
per unit voltage behind transient reactance is for a line to line fault to the subtransient
subjected to different types of faults. The current for a symmetrical three phase fault
type of fault and resulting fault current is on the generator.
mentioned in the following table (A) 0.866 (B) 1.126
Type of Fault Fault current in pu (C) 1.286 (D) None of these
3-phase 3.33 Q.25 How many ohms of resistance in the neutral
L–L 2.23 connection of the generator would limit the
L–G 3.01 subtransient line current for a single line to
ground fault to that for a three phase fault?
The values of positive sequence, negative
sequence and zero sequence reactance are (A) 0.0913 Ω (B) 0.0943 Ω
(A) X 1 = 0.3 pu, X 2 = 0.476 pu, X 0 = 0.22 pu (C) 0.0973 Ω (D) None of these
(B) X 1 = 0.7 pu, X 2 = 0.3 pu, X 0 = 0.3 pu Q.26 Determine the inductive reactance in ohms
to be inserted in the neutral connection of
Power System Analysis 02 [Workbook] 82 GATE ACADEMY®
the generator to limit the subtransient line
current for a single line to ground fault to
that for a three phase fault.
(A) 0.022 Ω (B) 0.032 Ω
(C) 0.042 Ω (D) None of these
Q.27 With the inductive reactance inserted in the
neutral of the generator, find the ratio of the
subtransient line current for line to line fault
to the subtransient line current for a three
phase fault.
(A) 0.866 (B) 1.126
(C) 1.286 (D) None of these
Q.28 With the inductive reactance inserted in the
neutral of the generator, find the ratio of the
subtransient line current for double line to
ground fault to the subtransient line current
for a three phase fault.
(A) 0.866 (B) 1
(C) 1.25 (D) None of these
Q.29 A synchronous generator is rated 25 MVA,
11 kV. It is star connected with the neutral
point solidly grounded. The generator is
operating at no load at rated voltage. Its
reactance are X ' = X 1 = X 2 = 0.20 and
X 0 = 0.08 pu . The order of magnitude of
symmetrical subtransient line currents for
shunt faults are :
(A) LG > LLG > 3 − φ > LL
(B) LL > 3 − φ > LLG > LG
(C) 3 − φ > LL > LG > LLG
(D) LLG > LG > 3 − φ > LL
 GATE ACADEMY® 83 Unsymmetrical Faults

Answer Keys

Objective & Numerical Answer Type Questions

1. 1.8 2. 73.52 3. 0.1 4. 6 5. 15397
6. D 7. B 8. D 9. D 10. 3.75
11. A 12. C 13. B 14. A 15. A
16. C 17. D 18. A 19. B 20. A
21. 1.25 22. B 23. B 24. D 25. A
26. * 27. 4 28. 11 29. * 30. B
31. C 32. B 33. C 34. B 35. A
36. * 37. A 38. * 39. 9454 40. 1.083
Practice (Objective & Numerical Answer) Questions
1. 3.52 2. C 3. B 4. * 5. A
6. * 7. A 8. B 9. C 10. C
11. B 12. D 13. B 14. B 15. C
16. D 17. A 18. B 19. C 20. 0.2
21. A 22. * 23. C 24. A 25. A
26. B 27. A 28. B 29. A

26. (1) 2540 A (2) 4234 V

29. (1) 30.7 kA (2) 23.7 kA (3) 12.8 kA
36. (1) 0.42 pu (2) 9.26 pu
38. 0, 57.73, 57.73

4. (1) 10 kA (2) 0
6. (1) 2.86 kA (2) 228.8 V
22. (1) 5 pu (2) 3.46 pu (3) 5.68 pu


 12 Load Flow Studies

Objective & Numerical Ans Type Questions :  − 5 2 2.5 0 

 2 − 10 2.5 4 
Q.1 A power system network is shown in figure. Ybus = j 
The reactances marked are in per unit. The  2.5 2.5 − 9 4 
 
per unit value of Y22 of the bus admittance 0 4 4 − 8
Matrix (YBUS ) is (A) 3 and 4 (B) 2 and 3
[GATE 1991, IIT Madras] (C) 1 and 2 (D) 1, 2 and 4
Q.4 A three-bus network is shown in the figure
j 0.1 j 0.2 j 0.1 below indicating the per unit impedance of
1 2 each element.
1 2 3
j 0.2 j 0.2

3 j 0.2 - j 0.08
j 0.1 j 0.1
(A) j10.0 (B) j 0.4
(C) − j 0.1 (D) − j 20.0
The bus admittance matrix, Y - bus, of the
Q.2 The network shown in the given figure has network is [GATE 2011, IIT Madras]
impedances in per unit as indicated. The
 0.3 − 0.2 0 
diagonal element Y22 of the bus admittance
(A) j − 0.2 0.12 0.08

matrix Ybus of the network is  
 0 0.08 0.02 
[GATE 2005, IIT Bombay]
 − 15 5 0 
1 2 3
+ j 0.1 + j 0.1
(B) j  5 7.5 − 12.5
 
 0 − 12.5 2.5 
- j 20.0 - j 20.0 - j10.0
 0.1 0.2 0 
(C) j 0.2 0.12 − 0.08

(A) − j19.8 (B) + j 20.0  
 0 − 0.08 0.10 
(C) + j 0.2 (D) − j19.95
 − 10 5 0 
Q.3 For the Y-bus matrix of a 4-bus system given 
(D) j 5 7.5 12.5
in per unit, the buses having shunt elements  
are [GATE 2009, IIT Roorkee]  0 12.5 − 10 
GATE ACADEMY® 85 Load Flow Studies
Q.5 The bus admittance matrix of a three-bus  − j19.9 j 20 0 
three-line system is (A)  j 20 − j 39.9 j 20  pu
 
 − 13 10 5 
 0 j 20 − j19.9 
Y = j  10 − 18 10 

 − j 39.95 j 20 0 
 5 10 − 13 
(B) j 20 − j 39.9 j 20  pu
If each transmission line between the two  
buses is represented by an equivalent π-  0 j 20 − j 39.95
network, the magnitude of the shunt  − j19.95 j 20 0 
susceptance of the line connecting bus 1 and (C)  j 20 − j 39.9 j 20  pu
 
2 is [GATE 2012, IIT Delhi]
 0 j 20 − j19.95
(A) 4 (B) 2
(C) 1 (D) 0  − j19.95 j 20 j 20 
Q.6 A 3-bus power system network consists of 3 (D)  j 20 − j 39.9 j 20  pu
 
transmission lines. The bus admittance  j 20 j 20 − j19.95
matrix of the uncompensated system is
Q.8 A 1000 × 1000 bus admittance matrix for an
[GATE 2015 Set – 02, IIT Kanpur]
electric power system has 8000 non zero
 − j6 j3 j4 
elements. The minimum number of branches
 j 3 − j 7 j5  pu.
  (transmission lines and transformers) in this
 j 4 j5 − j8 power system are _______ (up to 2 decimal
If the shunt capacitance of all transmission places). [GATE 2018, IIT Guwahati]
lines is 50% compensated, the imaginary Q.9 Consider following single line diagram, a
part of the 3rd row 3rd column element (in generator is connected to load as shown
per unit) of the bus admittance matrix after j0.1
compensation is
j0.2
(A) − j 7.0 (B) − j8.5 1 j0.2 2 3 j0.2 4
Load
(C) − j7.5 (D) − j 9.0
Calculate of value of Y33 and Z 33 ?
Q.7 The bus admittance matrix for a power
system network is Q.10 The bus impedance matrix of a 4-bus power
 − j 39.9 j 20 j 20  system is given by
 j 20 − j 39.9 j 20  pu  j 0.3435 j 0.2860 j 0.2723 j 0.2277 
   j 0.2860
 j 20 j 20 − j 39.9  j 0.3408 j 0.2586 j 0.2414 
Z bus = 
 j 0.2723 j 0.2586 j 0.2791 j 0.2209 
There is a transmission line, connected  
between buses 1 and 3, which is represented  j 0.2277 j 0.2414 j 0.2209 j 0.2791
by the circuit shown in figure. A branch having an impedance of j 0.2 Ω is
Reactance
is 0.05 pu
connected between bus 2 and the reference.
Then the values of Z 22, ( new ) and Z 23, ( new ) of
Susceptance Susceptance
is 0.05 pu is 0.05 pu the bus impedance matrix of the modified
network are respectively
If this transmission line is removed from
[GATE 2003, IIT Madras]
service, what is the modified bus admittance
matrix? (A) j 0.5408 Ω and j 0.4586 Ω
[GATE 2017 Set – 01, IIT Roorkee] (B) j 0.1260 Ω and j 0.0956 Ω
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 86 GATE ACADEMY®
(C) j 0.5408 Ω and j 0.0956 Ω Practice (Objective & Num Ans) Questions :
(D) j 0.1260 Ω and j 0.1630 Ω Q.1 In load flow studies of a power system, the
quantities specified at a voltage controlled
Q.11 The per unit power output of a salient pole
bus are ______ and _____ respectively.
generator which is connected to an infinite
(A) active power and voltage magnitude
bus is given by the expression,
(B) active power and reactive power
P = 1.4 sin δ + 0.15sin 2δ , where δ is the
load angle. Newton Raphson method is used (C) voltage magnitude and load angle
to calculate the value of δ for P = 0.8 pu . (D) active power and load angle
Q.2 In load flow analysis, the load connected at
If the initial guess is 300 , then its value (in
a bus is represented as
degree) at the end of the first iteration is
(A) constant current drawn from the bus.
[GATE 2018, IIT Guwahati] (B) constant impedance connected at the
(A) 150 (B) 28.480 bus.
(C) voltage and frequency dependent source
(C) 28.740 (D) 31.200
at the bus.
Q.12 In a load flow problem solved by Newton- (D) constant real and reactive power drawn
Raphson method with polar coordinates, the from the bus.
size of the Jacobian is 100 × 100 . If there are Q.3 In load-flow analysis, a voltage controlled
20 PV buses in addition to PQ Buses and a bus is treated as a load bus in subsequent
slack bus, the total number of buses in the iteration when a reactive power limit is
system is ______. violated. (True/False)
[GATE 2017 Set – 02, IIT Roorkee] Q.4 If the reference bus is changed in two load
Q.13 A power system has 100 buses including 10 flow runs with same system data and power
generator buses. For the load flow analysis obtained for reference bus taken as specified
using Newton-Raphson method in polar P and Q in the later run
coordinates, the size of the Jacobian is (A) the system loses will be unchanged but
complex bus voltages will change.
[GATE 2016 Set – 02, IISc Bangalore]
(B) the system losses will change but
(A) 189 × 189 (B) 100 × 100 complex bus voltages remain
(C) 90 × 90 (D) 180 × 180 unchanged.
Q.14 A power system consist of 300 buses out of (C) the system losses as well as complex bus
which 20 buses are generator bus, 25 buses voltage will change.
are ones with reactive power support and 15 (D) the system losses as well as complex bus
buses are the ones with fixed shunt voltage will be unchanged.
capacitors. All the other buses are load Q.5 For the Y-bus matrix given in per unit
buses. It is proposed to perform a load flow values, where the first, second, third and
analysis in the system using Newton- fourth row refers to bus 1, 2, 3 and 4
Raphson method. The size of the Newton respectively, the reactance diagram is
Raphson Jacobian matrix is  − 6 2 2.5 0 
 2 − 10 2.5 4 
[GATE 2003, IIT Madras]
Ybus = j  
(A) 553 × 553 (B) 540 × 540  2.5 2.5 − 9 4 
 
0 4 4 − 8
(C) 555 × 555 (D) 554 × 554
GATE ACADEMY® 87 Load Flow Studies
(A) (B) The load flow will converge only if the
j 0.67
slack bus is specified in area 2.
BUS1
j 0.4 j 0.5
(C) The load flow will converge if the slack
bus is specified in either area 1 or area 2.
j 0.67
(D) The load flow will not converge if only
j 0.4 BUS2 one slack bus is specified.
BUS3
Q.7 The Gauss Seidel load flow method has
j 0.25 j 0.25
BUS4 following disadvantages. Tick the incorrect
(B) statement.
- j 0.67 (A) Unreliable convergence
BUS1 (B) Slow convergence
- j 0.4 - j 0.5
(C) Choice of slack bus affects convergence.
- j 0.67 (D) A good initial guess for voltages is
- j 0.4 BUS2 essential for convergence.
BUS3
.Common Data For Questions 8 & 9.
- j 0.25 - j 0.25
BUS4 For a power system the admittance and impedance
(C) matrices for the fault studies are as follows.
j1.5
 − j8.75 j1.25 j 2.50 
BUS1
Ybus = j1.25 − j 6.25 j 2.50 

j 2.5 j2  
 j 2.50 j 2.50 − j5.00
j1.5

j 0.4 BUS2
 j 0.16 j 0.08 j 0.12 
BUS3 Z bus =  j 0.08 j 0.24 j 0.16
 
j4 j4  j 0.12 j 0.16 j 0.34 
BUS4
The pre-fault voltages are 1.0 pu at all the buses.
(D)
- j1.5 The system was unloaded prior to the fault. A solid
BUS1 3 phase fault takes place at bus 2.
- j 2.5 - j2 Q.8 The post fault voltages at buses 1 and 3 in
- j1.5
per unit respectively are
j 0.4 BUS2
(A) 0.24, 0.63 (B) 0.31, 0.76
BUS3 (C) 0.33, 0.67 (D) 0.67, 0.33
- j4 - j4 Q.9 The per unit fault feeds from generators
BUS4
connected to buses 1 and 2 respectively are
Q.6 A power system consists of 2 areas (Area 1 (A) 1.20, 2.51 (B) 1.55, 2.61
and Area 2) connected by a single tie-line. It (C) 1.66, 2.50 (D) 5.00, 2.50
is required to carry out a load flow study on
Q.10 Consider the two power systems shown in
this system. While entering the network
figure A below, which are initially not
data, the tie-line data (connectivity and
interconnected, and are operating in steady
parameters) is inadvertently left out. If the
state at the same frequency. Separate load
load flow program is run with this
flow solutions are computed individually for
incomplete data.
the two systems, corresponding to this
(A) The load flow will converge only if the scenario. The bus voltage phasors so
slack bus is specified in area 1. obtained are indicated on figure A.
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 88 GATE ACADEMY®
These two isolated systems are now delivered by the generator connected at the
interconnected by a short transmission line slack bus is
as shown in figure B, and it is found that (A) – 10 (B) 0
P1 = P2 = Q1 = Q2 = 0 (C) 10 (D) 20
1.0Ð - 200 1.0Ð - 50 Q.13 For a power system network with n nodes,
0
1.02Ð0 1.02Ð00 Z 33 of its bus impedance matrix is j0.5 per
unit. The voltage at node 3 is 1.3 ∠ –100 per
unit. If a capacitor having reactance of –j3.5
per unit is now added to the network
X Y
1.02Ð100 1.02Ð150
between node 3 and the reference node, the
P1 , Q1 P2 , Q2 current drawn by the capacitor per unit as
(A) 0.325 ∠ − 1000 (B) 0.325 ∠800
(C) 0.371 ∠ − 1000 (D) 0.433 ∠800
Q.14 A 183-bus power system has 150 PQ buses
X Y
and 32 PV buses. In the general case, to
The bus phase angular difference between
obtain the load flow solution using Newton-
generator bus X and generator bus Y after the
Raphson method in polar co-ordinates, the
interconnection is
minimum number of simultaneous equations
(A) 100 (B) 250 to be solved is ______
(C) − 300 (D) 300 Assignment (Objective & Num Ans) Questions :
.Common Data For Questions 11 & 12. Q.1 Determine the correctness or otherwise of
In the following network, the voltage magnitudes at the following assertion [A] and the reason
all buses are equal to 1 pu, the voltage phase angles [R].
are very small, and the line resistances are Assertion [A] : Fast decoupled load flow
negligible. All the line reactances are equal to j1Ω method gives approximate load flow
Bus 1 (slack)
solution because it uses several assumptions.
j1 W Bus 2
Reason [R] : Accuracy depends on the
power mismatch vector tolerance.
P2 = 0.1 pu (A) Both [A] and [R] are true and [R] is the
correct reason for [A].
j1 W j1 W
(B) Both [A] and [R] are true but [R] is not
Bus 3 the correct reason for [A].
P3 = 0.2 pu
(C) Both [A] and [R] are false.
Q.11 The voltage phase angles in rad at buses 2 (D) [A] is false and [R] is true.
and 3 are Q.2 In a 100 bus power system, there are 10
(A) θ2 = − 0.1, θ3 = − 0.2 generators. In a particular iteration of
(B) θ2 = 0, θ3 = − 0.1 Newton Raphson load flow technique (in
polar coordinates), two of the PV buses are
(C) θ2 = 0.1, θ3 = 0.1
converted to PQ type. In this iteration,
(D) θ2 = 0.1, θ3 = 0.2 (A) the number of unknown voltage angles
Q.12 If the base impedance and the line-to-line increases by two and the number of
base voltage are 100 Ω and 100 kV, unknown voltage magnitudes increases
respectively, then the real power in MW by two.
GATE ACADEMY® 89 Load Flow Studies
(B) the number of unknown voltage angles and Y33 = − j 7 pu
remains unchanged and the number of
Bus-1 Bus-2
unknown voltage magnitudes increases
by two. jq
(C) the number of unknown voltage angles
increases by two and the number of jr jp
unknown voltage magnitudes decreases
by two. Bus-3
(D) the number of unknown voltage angles
The per unit values of the line reactances p,
remains unchanged and the number of
q and r shown in the figure are
unknown voltage magnitudes decreases
by two. (A) p = − 0.2, q = − 0.1, r = − 0.5
Q.3 The magnitude of three-phase fault currents (B) p = 0.2, q = 0.1, r = 0.5
at buses A and B of a power system are 10 (C) p = − 5, q = −10, r = − 2
pu and 8 pu, respectively. Neglect all
(D) p = 5, q = 10, r = 2
resistances in the system and consider the
pre-fault system to be unloaded. The pre- Q.6 The Ybus matrix of a two-bus power system
fault voltage at all buses in the system is 1.0 having two identical parallel lines connected
pu. The voltage magnitude at BUS B during between them in pu is given as
a three-phase fault at BUS A is 0.8 pu. The
 − j8 j 20 
voltage magnitude at BUS A during a three- Ybus =  
phase fault at BUS B (in per unit) is  j 20 − j8
________. The magnitude of the series reactance of
Q.4 A 10-bus power system consists of four each line in pu (round off up to one decimal
generator buses indexed as G1, G2, G3, G4 place) is _______.
and six load buses indexed as L1, L2, L3,
L4, L5, L6. The generator-bus G1 is
considered as slack bus, and the load buses
L3 and L4 are voltage controlled buses. The
generator at bus G2 cannot supply the
required reactive power demand, and hence
it is operating at its maximum reactive
power limit. The number of non-linear
equations required for solving the load flow
problem using Newton-Raphson method in
polar form is ______.
Q.5 A 3-bus power system is shown in the figure
below, where the diagonal elements of Y-
bus matrix are :
Y11 = − j12 pu, Y22 = − j15 pu
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 90 GATE ACADEMY®

Answer Keys

Objective & Numerical Answer Type Questions

1. D 2. D 3. C 4. B 5. B
6. B 7. C 8. 3500 9. − j15, j 0.4 10. B
11. C 12. 61 13. A 14. D
Practice (Objective & Numerical Answer) Questions
1. A 2. D 3. True 4. A 5. A
6. D 7. A 8. D 9. C 10. A
11. B 12. C 13. D 14. 332
Assignment (Objective & Numerical Answer) Questions
1. D 2. B 3. 0.84 4. 14 5. B
6. 0.1


 13 Economic Load Dispatch

Objective & Numerical Ans Type Questions : two plants optimally share 1000 MW load at
incremental fuel cost of 100 Rs/MWh, the ratio of
Q.1 The incremental costs (in Rupees/MWh) of
load shared by plants P1 and P2 is
operating two generating units are function of
[GATE 2014-Kharagpur]
their respective powers P1 and P2 in MW, and are
(A) 1 : 4 (B) 2 : 3
given by [GATE 2015-Kanpur]
(C) 3 : 2 (D) 4 : 1
dC1 dC2
= 0.2 P1 + 50 = 0.24 P2 + 40 Q.4 A lossless power system has to serve a load of 250
dP1 dP2
MW. There are two generators ( G1 and G2 ) in the
Where 20 MW ≤ P1 ≤ 150 MW system with cost C1 and C2 respectively defined
20 MW ≤ P2 ≤ 150 MW as follows [GATE 2008-Bangalore]
For a certain load demand P1 and P2 have been C1 ( PG1 ) = PG1 + 0.055PG21
chosen such that C2 ( PG2 ) = 3PG2 + 0.03PG22
dC1 dC2 Where PG1 and PG2 are the MW injections from
= 76 Rs/MWh = 68.8 Rs/MWh
dP1 dP2 generator G1 and G2 respectively. Then the
If the generations are rescheduled to minimize the maximum cost dispatch will be
total cost, then P2 is ___________. (A) PG1 = 250 MW, PG2 = 0 MW

Q.2 Consider the economic dispatch problem for a (B) PG1 = 150 MW, PG2 = 100 MW
power plant having two generating units. The fuel (C) PG1 = 100 MW, PG2 = 150 MW
costs in Rs/MWh along with the generation limits (D) PG1 = 0 MW, PG2 = 250 MW
for the two units are given below : Q.5 The incremental cost curves in Rs/MW hr for two
C1 ( P1 ) = 0.01 P12 + 30 P1 + 10 ; 100 MW ≤ P1 ≤ 150 MW generators supplying a common load of 700 MW
C2 ( P2 ) = 0.05P22 + 10 P2 + 10 ; 100 MW ≤ P2 ≤ 180 MW are shown in the figures. The maximum and
The incremental cost (in Rs/MWh) of the power minimum generation limits are also indicated. The
plant when it supplies 200 MW is ______. optimum generation schedule is :
[GATE 2007-Kanpur]
[GATE 2015-Kanpur]
Q.3 The fuel cost functions of two power plants are
Plant P1 : C1 = 0.05 Pg12 + APg1 + B

Plant P2 : C2 = 0.10 Pg 22 + 3 APg 2 + 2 B

Where, Pg 1 and Pg 2 are the generated powers of

two plants, and A and B are the constants. If the
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 92 GATE ACADEMY®
(A) Generator A : 400 MW, Generator B : 300 MW The generator limits are
(B) Generator A : 350 MW, Generator B : 350 MW 100 MW ≤ PG1 ≤ 650 MW
(C) Generator A : 450 MW, Generator B : 250 MW 50 MW ≤ PG2 ≤ 500 MW
(D) Generator A : 425 MW, Generator B : 275 MW
A load demand of 600 MW is supplied by the
Q.6 A load centre is at an equidistant from the two generators in an optimal manner. Neglecting
thermal generating stations G1 and G2 as shown losses in the transmission network, determine
in the figure. The fuel cost characteristics of the the optimal generation of each generator.
generating stations are given by Q.9 The incremental cost characteristics of two
[GATE 2005-Bombay] generators delivering 200 MW are as follows
dF1 dF2
= 2 + 0.01P1 = 1.6 + 0.02 P2
dP1 dP2

For economic operation, the generations P1 and

F1 = a + bP1 + cP12 Rs/hr P2 should be [GATE 2000, IES 2011, IES 2007]
2
F2 = a + bP2 + 2cP Rs/hr
2
(A) P1 = P2 = 100 MW
Where P1 and P2 are the generation in MW of G1
(B) P1 = 80 MW, P2 = 120 MW
and G2 , respectively
(C) P1 = 200 MW, P2 = 0 MW
For most economic generation to meet 300 MW of
(D) P1 = 120 MW, P2 = 80 MW
load, P1 and P2 , respectively, are
Q.10 In a power system, the fuel inputs per hour of
(A) 150 MW, 150 MW (B) 100 MW, 200 MW
plants 1 and 2 are given as [GATE 1998-Delhi]
(C) 200 MW, 100 MW (D) 175 MW, 125 MW
2
F1 = 0.2 P + 30 P1 + 100 Rs/hr
1
Q.7 Incremental fuel costs (in some appropriate unit)
for a power plant consisting of three generating F2 = 0.25P22 + 40 P2 + 150 Rs/hr
units are [GATE 2003-Madras] The limits of generator are
IC1 = 20 + 0.3P1 IC2 = 30 + 0.4 P2 IC3 = 30 20 MW ≤ P1 ≤ 80 MW
Where P1 is the power in MW generated by unit i, 40 MW ≤ P2 ≤ 200 MW
for i = 1, 2 and 3.
Find the economic operating schedule of
Assume that all the three units are operating all generation, if the load demand is 130 MW,
the time. Minimum and maximum loads on each neglecting transmission losses.
unit are 50 MW and 300 MW respectively. If the
Q.11 The incremental cost characteristics of two
plant is operating on economic load dispatch to
generators delivering 200 MW are as follows
supply the total power demand of 700 MW, the
dF1 dF2
power generated by each unit is = 2 + 0.01P1 = 1.6 + 0.02 P2
dP1 dP2
(A) P1 = 242.86 MW; P2 = 157.14 MW; P3 = 300 MW
For economic operation generation P1 and P2
(B) P1 = 157.14 MW; P2 = 242.86 MW; P3 = 300 MW
should be [ESE 2013]
(C) P1 = 300.00 MW; P2 = 300.00 MW; P3 = 100 MW
(A) 100 MW and 100 MW
(D) P1 = 233.3 MW; P2 = 233.3 MW; P3 = 233.4 MW
(B) 80 MW and 120 MW
Q.8 A power system has two generators with the
(C) 200 MW and 100 MW
following cost curves [GATE 2001-Kanpur]
(D) 120 MW and 80 MW
Generator 1 : C1 ( PG1 ) = 0.006PG21 + 8PG1 + 350
Q.12 The incremental fuel costs for two generating units
Generator 2 : C2 ( PG2 ) = 0.009PG22 + 7 PG 2 + 400 G1 and G2 are given by IC1 = 25 + 0.2 PG1 and
(Thousand rupees per hour) IC2 = 32 + 0.2PG 2 where PG1 and PG 2 generated by
 GATE ACADEMY® 93 Load Flow Studies
the units. The economic allocation for a total load Q.17 The incremental fuel cost for two generating
of 250 MW, neglecting transmission loss, is given units are given by
by [ESE 2011] IC1 = 25 + 0.2 PG1 IC2 = 32 + 0.2 PG 2
(A) PG1 = 142.5 MW and PG 2 = 107.5 MW Where PG1 and PG 2 are real power generated by
(B) PG1 = 109.75 MW and PG 2 = 140.25 MW the units. The economic allocation for a total load
(C) PG1 = 125 MW and PG 2 = 125 MW of 250 MW, neglecting transmission loss is given
by, [ESE 1995]
(D) PG1 = 100 MW and PG 2 = 150 MW
(A) PG1 = 142.25 MW , PG 2 = 107.75 MW
Q.13 Two generating stations connected to a load centre
having capacity of 50 MVA and 75 MVA deliver (B) PG1 = 109.75 MW , PG 2 = 140.25 MW

100 MW to the load. The incremental cost of plant (C) PG1 = PG 2 = 125 MW
1 is 15 + 0.15P1 and that of the plant 2 is 18 + 0.15P2 . (D) PG1 = 100 MW , PG 2 = 150 MW
What are the values of P1 and P2 , respectively? Q.18 The fuel cost of an alternator is expressed as
[ESE 2008] F = 0.1Pg2 + 20 Pg + 30
(A) 60 MW, 40 MW (B) 50 MW each
The capacity of alternator is 100 MW. Find the
(C) 72 MW, 28 MW (D) 30 MW, 70 MW fuel cost and increment fuel cost of alternator if it
Q.14 The cost function of a 50 MW generator is given is delivering 50% of capacity.
by ( Pi is the generator loading) [ESE 2000] (A) 3030 Rs/hr, 50 Rs/MWh
2
F ( Pi ) = 225 + 53Pi + 0.02Pi (B) 1280 Rs/hr, 50 Rs/MWh
When 100% loading is applied, the incremental (C) 3030 Rs/hr, 30 Rs/MWh
fuel cost will be (D) 1280 Rs/hr, 30 Rs/MWh
(A) Rs 55 per MWh (B) Rs 55 per MW Common Data Questions 19 to 21
(C) Rs 33 per MWh (D) Rs 33 per MW The fuel costs of a two unit plant are given by
Q.15 The incremental generating costs of two C1 = 0.2P12 + 40P1 + 120
generating units are given by [ESE 1997]
C2 = 0.25P22 + 30 P2 + 150
IC1 = 0.1 X + 20 Rs/MWhr
The maximum and minimum loading on each unit
IC2 = 0.15 Y + 18 Rs/MWhr
is 100 MW and 25 MW, the demand is 180 MW
where X and Y are power (in MW) generated by and transmission losses are neglected.
the two units.
Q.19 Determine the economic operating schedule.
For a total demand of 300 MW, the value (in MW)
(A) P1 = 85.89 MW, P2 = 94.11 MW
of X and Y will be respectively
(B) P1 = 93.11 MW, P2 = 87.89 MW
(A) 172 and 128 (B) 128 and 172
(C) P1 = 88.89 MW, P2 = 91.11 MW
(C) 175 and 125 (D) 200 and 100
Q.16 The incremental cost characteristics of two units in (D) None of the above
a plant are [ESE 1996] Q.20 Determine the total cost of generation.
IC1 = 0.1P1 + 8 Rs/MWh (A) 10204.43 Rs/hr (B) 10214.43 Rs/hr

IC2 = 0.15P2 + 3 Rs/MWh (C) 10224.43 Rs/hr (D) None of these

Q.21 If the load is equally shared by both the units
When the total load is 100 MW, the optimum
determine the saving obtained by loading the
sharing of load P1 and P2 is
units as per equal incremental production cost.
(A) 40 MW, 60 MW (B) 33.3 MW, 66.7 MW
(A) 0.57 Rs/hr (B) 1.57 Rs/hr
(C) 60 MW, 40 MW (D) 66.7 MW, 33.3 MW
(C) 2.57 Rs/hr (D) None of these
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 94 GATE ACADEMY®
Q.22 The fuel cost function for three thermal plants
are given by
F1 = 350 + 7.2P1 + 0.004 P12

F2 = 500 + 7.3P2 + 0.0025P22

F3 = 600 + 6.74 P3 + 0.003P32

If P1 , P2 , P3 are in MW, find optimal schedule for

a demand of 600 MW.
List – I
(A) 138.125 MW, 201 MW, 260.736 MW
P. load more than 2PG
(B) 148.125 MW, 201 MW, 250.763 MW
(C) 138.125 MW, 211 MW, 250.763 MW Q. load equal to 2PG

(D) None of the above R. load less than 2PG

Q.23 The fuel cost of two units are : List – II
C1 = 0.024P12 + 8P1 + 80 1. Gen A will shore more load then Gen B

C2 = 0.04 P22 + 6 P2 + 120 2. Gen A and Gen B will shore load of PG each

The maximum and minimum loads on the unit are 3. Gen B will shore more load then Gen A
100 MW and 10 MW. Determine the minimum Codes : P Q R
cost of generation when the following loads are (A) 1 2 3
supplied.
(B) 3 2 1
(C) 1 3 2
(D) 3 1 2

Practice (Objective & Num Ans) Questions :

Q.1 The figure shows a two-generator system
supplying a load of PD = 40 MW, connected at bus
(A) 26325 Rs (B) 39487.5 Rs 2. [GATE 2012-Delhi]
(C) 52650 Rs (D) None of these Bus 1 Bus 2
G1 G2
Q.24 Consider the following incremental cost curve in PG 2
Rs/MWh for a plant having two units. PG1
dC1 dC2
= 0.2 PG1 + 40 = 0.25PG 2 + 30
dPG1 dPG 2 PD = 40 MW

Calculate the extra cost incurred in Rs/hr, if a The fuel cost of generators G1 and G2 are :
load of 220 MW is scheduled as PG1 = PG 2 = 110 C1 ( PG1 ) = 10,000 Rs/MWhr and
MW.
C2 ( PG 2 ) = 12,500 Rs/MWhr
(A) 22.5 Rs/hr (B) 24.5 Rs/hr
and the loss in the line is Ploss ( pu ) = 0.5PG21( pu ) , where
(C) 26.5 Rs/hr (D) None of these
the loss coefficient is specified in pu on a 100 MVA
Q.25 The given figure shows the incremental fuel cost base. The most economic power generation
curves of generator A and B. If both generators A schedule in MW is
and B are running match List-I (load) with List-II
(A) PG1 = 20, PG 2 = 22 (B) PG1 = 22, PG 2 = 20
(load sharing) and select the correct answer
using the codes given below. (C) PG1 = 20, PG 2 = 20 (D) PG1 = 0, PG 2 = 40
GATE ACADEMY® 95 Load Flow Studies
Q.2 A load center of 120 MW derives power from two Q.6 The power generated by two plants are :
stations connected by 220 kV transmission lines of P1 = 50 MW and P2 = 40 MW . [ESE 1997]
25 km and 75 km as shown in the figure below.
If the loss coefficients are B11 = 0.001, B22 =
The three generators G1 , G2 and G3 are of 100
0.0025 and B12 = − 0.0005 then power loss will be
MW capacity each and have identical fuel cost
characteristics. The minimum loss generation (A) 5.5 MW (B) 6.5 MW
schedule for supplying the 120 MW load is (C) 4.5 MW (D) 8.5 MW
[GATE 2011-Madras]
Q.7 In the optimum generator scheduling of different
power plants, the minimum fuel cost is obtained
when [ESE 1994]
(A) only the incremental fuel cost of each plant is
P1 = 80 MW P1 = 60 MW
same
(A) P2 = 20 MW + losses (B) P2 = 30 MW + losses
P3 = 20 MW P3 = 30 MW (B) the penalty factor of each plant is the same

P1 = 40 MW P1 = 30 MW (C) the ratio of the incremental fuel cost to the

(C) P2 = 40 MW + losses (D) P2 = 45 MW + losses penalty factor for each plants is the same
P3 = 40 MW P3 = 45 MW (D) the incremental fuel cost of each plant
Q.3 Two power plants interconnected by a tie line as multiplied by its penalty factor is the same
shown in the above figure have loss formula Q.8 Assertion (A) : Optimum loading of the power
−3 −1
coefficient B11 = 10 MW . Power is being stations interconnected by transmission line is
dispatched economically with plant 1 as 100 MW obtained when the incremental fuel cost of each
and plant 2 as 125 MW. The penalty factors for station multiplied by its penalty factor is the
plants 1 and 2 are respectively [ESE 2001] same for all the stations in the system.
Reason (R) : The total load demand and the
transmission losses at any instant must be met by
the total generation at that instant and the
penalty factor is a function of the incremental
transmission loss. [ESE 1993]
(A) 1 and 1.25 (B) 1.25 and 1
(A) Both A and R are true and R is the correct
(C) 1 and zero (D) zero and 1
explanation of A.
Q.4 In terms of power generation and Bmn coefficients,
(B) Both A and R are true but R is NOT a correct
the transmission loss for a two plant system is
explanation of A.
(Notations have their usual meaning) [ESE 2000]
(C) A is true but R is false.
(A) P12 B11 + 2 P1 P2 B12 + P22 B22
(D) A is false but R is true.
(B) P12 B11 − 2 P1 P2 B12 + P22 B22
Q.9 A power system is supplied by three plants P, Q
(C) P22 B11 + 2 P1 P2 B12 + P12 B22
and R, all of which are operating on economic
(D) P12 B11 + P1 P2 B12 + P22 B22 dispatch. At the bus of plant P the incremental
Q.5 If for a given alternator in economic operation cost is 10.0 Rs. Per MWh, at plant Q it is 9.0 Rs.
mode, the incremental cost is given by Per MWh and at plant R it is 11.0 Rs. Per MWh.
(0.012 P + 8) Rs/MWh, ∂PL / ∂P = 0.2 and plant The plants which have the highest and lowest
λ = 25 , then the power generation is [ESE 1999] penalty factor are respectively?

(A) 1000 MW (B) 1250 MW (A) P and R (B) Q and R

(C) 750 MW (D) 1500 MW (C) Q and P (D) R and P
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 96 GATE ACADEMY®
Common Data Questions 10 & 11 Q.13 Find the penalty factors for plant 1 and 2.
For a simple system connecting two generating (A) 1.12, 1.26 (B) 1.22, 1.36
plants to one load, the voltage at bus C is (C) 1.32, 1.46 (D) 1.32, 3.175
0
VC = 1∠0 pu . The currents in lines AC and BC are Q.14 Find the additional cost per hour to increase the
0 0
1.05 ∠0 pu and 0.9 ∠0 pu respectively. The line output of plant 1 by 1 MW.

impedances are (A) 151 Rs/MWh (B) 161 Rs/MWh

Z AC = (0.05 + j 0.2) pu, Z BC = (0.04 + j 0.16) pu, and (C) 171 Rs/MWh (D) None of these
Q.15 In a two plant system the entire load is located at
ZCD = (0.03 + j 0.12) pu
plant 2, which is connected to plant 1 by a
transmission line. Plant 1 supplies 100 MW of
power with a corresponding transmission loss of 5
MW. Calculate the penalty factor for the two
plants.
(A) L1 = 1, L2 = 1 (B) L1 = 1.11, L2 = 1
(C) L1 = 1, L2 = 1.11 (D) None of these
Q.10 Calculate the loss coefficients in pu. Common Data Questions 16 & 17
(A) B11 = 0.0722, B12 = 0.0275, B22 = 0.0652 In a two bus system, a load of 125 MW is
transmitted from plant 1 to the load and a loss of
(B) B11 = 0.0625, B12 = 0.0275, B22 = 0.0722
15.625 MW is incurred. The load is at plant 2. The
(C) B11 = 0.0275, B12 = 0.0652, B22 = 0.0722
cost of received power is Rs 24/MWh. The
(D) None of the above incremental production costs of the plants are :
Q.11 Calculate the transmission loss. dC1 dC2
= 0.025P1 + 15 = 0.05 P2 + 20
dP1 dP2
(A) 0.1016 pu (B) 0.2016 pu
(C) 0.3016 pu (D) None of these Q.16 Determine the generation schedule.
(A) P1 = 120 MW, P2 = 80 MW
Q.12 On the system consisting of two generating plants
the incremental costs with P1 and P2 are (B) P1 = 123.28 MW, P2 = 80 MW

dC1 dC2 (C) P1 = 125 MW, P2 = 80 MW

= 0.15 P1 + 150 = 0.25 P2 + 175
dP1 dP2 (D) None of the above
The system is operating on economical dispatch Q.17 Determine the load demand.
with P1 = P2 = 200 MW and ∂PL / ∂P2 = 0.2 . Find (A) 64.8 MW (B) 108.08 MW
the penalty factors. (C) 188.08 MW (D) None of these
(A) L1 = 1.5625, L2 = 1.25 (B) L1 = 1.25, L2 = 1.5 Q.18 A system consists of two plants connected by a
transmission line. The load is at plant 2. If a load
(C) L1 = 1.5, L2 = 1.75 (D) None of these
of 125 MW is transmitted from plant 1 to the load,
Common Data Questions 13 & 14 there is a loss of 12.5 MW. Determine the
A power system has two generating plants and the generation schedule and the load demand if the
power is being dispatched economically with cost of the received power is Rs 70 per MWh. The
P1 = 150 MW and P2 = 275 MW . Loss coefficients incremental costs of the two plants are given by
in MW −1 are dC1 dC2
= 0.25 P1 + 40 = 0.2 P2 + 50
dP1 dP2
B11 = 0.10 ×10−2 B12 = − 0.01×10−2 B22 = 0.13 × 10−2
(A) P1 = 82.87 MW, P2 = 100 MW, PR = 177.37 MW
To raise the total load on the system by 1 MW will
(B) P1 = 125 MW, P2 = 100 MW, PR = 212.5 MW
cost an additional Rs 200 per hour.
GATE ACADEMY® 97 Load Flow Studies
(C) P1 = 93.42 MW, P2 = 100 MW, PR = 183.46 MW Q.19 The optimal scheduling for generators are given as

(D) None of the above (A) PG1 = 218.857 MW, PG 2 = 159.029 MW

Statement for Linked Questions 19 & 20 (B) PG1 = 200 MW, PG 2 = 160 MW
A two bus power system is shown in the figure. (C) PG1 = 400 MW, PG 2 = 150 MW
Incremental fuel costs of the two generators are
(D) PG1 = 318.56 MW, PG 2 = 281.44 MW
given as
Q.20 The power loss will be
IC1 = (0.35 PG1 + 41) Rs / MWhr
(A) 8.1 MW (B) 44.70 MW
IC2 = (0.35 PG 2 + 41) Rs / MWhr
(C) 7.92 MW (D) 6.4 MW
2
Loss expression is, PL = 0.001( PG 2 − 70) MW

The total incremental cost of the system is

117.6 Rs / MWhr

PG1 PG 2

Answer Keys

Objective & Numerical Answer Type Questions

1. 136.36 2. * 3. D 4. C 5. C
6. C 7. A 8. * 9. D 10. *
11. D 12. A 13. B 14. A 15. A
16. A 17. A 18. D 19. C 20. B
21. A 22. A 23. A 24. A 25. A
Practice (Objective & Numerical Answer) Questions
1. A 2. A 3. B 4. A 5. A
6. C 7. D 8. A 9. B 10. A
11. B 12. A 13. C 14. A 15. B
16. B 17. C 18. A 19. A 20. C


 14 Power System Stability

Objective & Numerical Ans Type Questions : Q.3 Steady state stability of a power system is
the ability of the power system to
Q.1 A generator with constant 1 p.u. terminal
voltage supplies power through a step up [GATE EE 1999-Bombay]
transformer of 0.12 p.u. reactance and a (A) maintain voltage at the rated voltage
double circuit line to an infinite bus bar as level
shown in the figure. The infinite bus voltage (B) maintain frequency exactly at 50 Hz
is maintained at 1 p.u. Neglecting the (C) maintain a spinning reserve margin at
resistances and susceptances of the system, all times
the steady state stability power limit of the
(D) maintain synchronism between
system is 6.25 p.u. If one of the double
machines and on external tie lines.
circuit is tripped, then resulting steady state
stability power limit in p.u. will be Q.4 Bundled conductors are employed to
[GATE EE 2005-Bombay] improve the [GATE EE 1997-Madras]
1 2 3 (A) appearance of the transmission line
X (B) mechanical stability of the line
(C) system stability
X
(D) increases the short circuit current
(A) 12.5 p.u. (B) 3.125 p.u. Q.5 Stability of a power system can be improved
(C) 10.0 p.u. (D) 5.0 p.u. by [ESE 2016]
Q.2 A round rotor generator with internal 1. Using series compensators
voltage E1 = 2.0 pu and X = 1.1 pu is
2. Using parallel transmission lines
connected to a round rotor synchronous
3. Reducing voltage of transmission
motor with internal voltage E2 = 1.3 pu and
Which of the above statements are correct?
X = 1.2 pu. The reactance of the line
(A) 1 only (B) 2 only
connecting the generator to the motor is 0.5
pu. When the generator supplies 0.5 pu (C) 2 and 3 (D) 1 and 2
power, the rotor angle difference between Q.6 The steady state stability limit of a
the machines will be synchronous machine connected to infinite
[GATE EE 2003-Madras] bus is 2.2 pu, infinite bus voltage is 1 pu and
(A) 57.42 0
(B) 10 synchronous machine voltage is 1.1 pu. The
(C) 32.580 (D) 122.580 transfer reactance between generator and
infinite bus is [ESE 2013]
GATE ACADEMY® 99 Power System Stability
(A) j 0.5 (B) – j 0.5 (D) No generalization can be made
(C) j 1.0 (D) – j 1.0 regarding the equality or otherwise of
Q.7 An alternator having an induced emf of 1.6 the steady state stability limit and
transient stability limit.
p.u. is connected to an infinite bus of 1.0
p.u. If the bus bar has reactance of 0.6 p.u. Q.12 Two synchronous machines of equal rating
and alternator has reactance of 0.2 p.u., what have internal voltages of (1.1 + j 0.5) and
is the maximum power that can be (0.8 − j 0.4) pu respectively. The machines
transferred? [ESE 2007] are connected by a line of 50 km length
(A) 2 p.u. (B) 2.67 p.u having only reactance and the second
machine receives power of 0.9 pu. Assume
(C) 5 p.u. (D) 6 p.u.
that there is no internal reactance for
Q.8 The steady state stability limits for round machines. The reactance of line per km
rotor and salient pole 3-phase synchronous length is _____ pu.
generator are attained at the values of power Q.13 Find the steady state power limit of a system
angle δ. [ESE 2006] consisting of a generator equivalent
(A) = π / 2, and = π / 2, respectively reactance 0.5 pu connected to an infinite bus
(B) < π / 2, and < π / 2, respectively through a series reactance of 1 pu. The
terminal voltage of the generator is held at
(C) < π / 2, and < π / 2, respectively 1.2 pu and the voltage of the infinite bus is 1
(D) = π / 2, and < π / 2, respectively pu.
Q.9 If a 500 MVA, 11 kV three phase generator (A) 1.05 pu (B) 1.15 pu
at 50 Hz feeds, through a transfer impedance (C) 1.25 pu (D) 1.35 pu
of (0.0 + j 0.605) Ω per phase, an infinite Q.14 A 50 Hz synchronous generator is initially
bus also at 11 kV, then the maximum steady connected to a long lossless transmission
state power transfer on the base of 500 line which is open circuited at the receiving
MVA and 11 kV is [ESE 2001] end. With the field voltage held constant, the
generator is disconnected from the
(A) 1.0 pu (B) 0.8 pu
transmission line. Which of the following
(C) 0.5 pu (D) 0.4 pu may be said about the steady state terminal
Q.10 An infinite bus of 1 pu is fed from a voltage and field current of the generator?
synchronous machine having E=1.1 pu. If [GATE EE 2010-Guwahati]
the transfer reactance between them is 0.5
pu, the steady state power limit will be
[ESE 1999] (A) The magnitude of terminal voltage
decreases, and the field current does not
(A) 1.1 pu (B) 0.5 pu
change
(C) 2.2 pu (D) 1 pu
(B) The magnitude of terminal voltage
Q.11 Which one of the following statement is increases, and the field current does not
true? [ESE 1995] change
(A) Steady-state stability limit is greater (C) The magnitude of terminal voltage
than transient stability limit. increases, and the field current
(B) Steady-state stability limit is equal to increases
transient stability limit. (D) The magnitude of terminal voltage does
(C) Steady-state stability limit is less than not change, and the field current
the transient stability limit. decreases
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 100 GATE ACADEMY®
Q.15 Determine the steady state power limit for (5) the inductor replaced by a resistor of
the system shown in figure. resistance 1.5 pu.
j 0.1pu j 0.4 pu j 0.4 pu Q.18 A 500 MW, 21 kV, 50 Hz, 3-phase, 2 pole
G V = 1pu synchronous generator having a rated p.f. =
E = 1.2 pu 0.9, has a moment of inertia of
X dg = j 0.6 pu
- j 0.5 pu j 0.5 pu 27.5 ×103 kg-m2 . The inertia constant (H)
will be [GATE EE 2009-Roorkee]
(A) 1.0 pu (B) 1.2 pu
(A) 2.44 s (B) 2.71 s
(C) 0.6 pu (D) 0.8 pu
(C) 4.88 s (D) 5.42 s
Q.16 The generator shown in figure is delivering
1 pu power to the infinite bus, with the Q.19 The p.u. parameters for a 500 MVA
generator terminal voltage of Vt = 1 pu . Find machine on its own base are :
[GATE EE 2005-Bombay]
j 0.5 pu 1Ð00
EÐd
Vt Inertia, M = 20 p.u., Reactance, X = 2 p.u.
G
8 The p.u. values of inertia and reactance on
j 0.25 pu j 0.1 pu j 0.5 pu 100 MVA common base, respectively, are
(1) the generator emf behind transient (A) 4, 0.4 (B) 100, 10
reactance. (C) 4, 10 (D) 100, 0.4
(2) the maximum power that can be Q.20 A 100 MVA, 11 kV, 3-phase, 50 Hz, 8 pole
transferred under healthy system synchronous generator has an inertia
condition. constant H equal to 4 seconds. The stored
(3) the maximum power that can be energy in the rotor of the generator at
transferred if one line is open. E
(4) the maximum power that can be synchronous speed will be H =
G
transferred if one line is shorted in the
[GATE EE 1997-Madras]
middle.
Q.17 For the system shown in figure an inductor (A) 100 MJ (B) 400 MJ
of reactance 0.6 pu per phase is connected at (C) 800 MJ (D) 12.5 MJ
the point of transmission line. Q.21 A 50 MVA, 11 kV, 3-phase generator has a
j 0.1 pu stored energy of 400 MJ. Its inertia constant
V = 1 pu is [ESE 2013]
G
j 0.3 pu j 0.3 pu Infinite (A) 4 (B) 8
E = 1.2 pu Bus
X dg = j 0.8 pu (C) 2 (D) 16
j 0.6 pu Q.22 If the inertia constant H = 8 MJ/MVA for a
50 MVA generator, the stored energy is
Determine the steady state power limit with [ESE 2011]
(1) inductor switch open. (A) 50 MJ (B) 8 MJ
(2) inductor switch closed.
(C) 400 MJ (D) 6.25 MJ
(3) inductor replaced by a capacitor of the
Q.23 For 800 MJ stored energy in the rotor at
same pu reactance.
synchronous speed, what is the inertia
(4) with a capacitor of the same pu
constant H for a 50 Hz, four pole turbo
reactance connected in series with the
generator rated 100 MVA, 11 kV?
line at the same point instead of shunt
capacitor. [ESE 2005]
GATE ACADEMY® 101 Power System Stability
(A) 2.0 MJ/MVA (B) 4.0 MJ/MVA .Common Data For Questions 28 & 29.
(C) 6.0 MJ/MVA (D) 8.0 MJ/MVA A generator feeds power to an infinite bus
Q.24 If a generator of 250 MVA rating has an through a double circuit transmission line. A
inertia constant of 6 MJ/MVA, its inertia 3 phase fault occurs at the middle point of
constant on 100 MVA base is [ESE 2000] one of the lines. The infinite bus voltage is 1
(A) 15 MJ/MVA (B) 10.5 MJ/MVA pu, the transient internal voltage of the
(C) 6 MJ/MVA (D) 2.4 MJ/MVA generator is 1.1 pu and the equivalent
Q.25 A 3-phase, 2-pole, 50 Hz, synchronous transfer admittance during fault is 0.8 pu.
generator has a rating 250 MVA, 0.8 pf The 100 MVA generator has an inertia
lagging. The kinetic energy of the machine constant of 5 MJ/MVA and it was delivering
at synchronous speed is 1000 MJ. The 1.0 pu power prior of the fault with rotor
machine is running steadily at synchronous power angle of 300 . The system frequency is
speed and delivering 60 MW power at a 50 Hz. [GATE EE 2006-Kharagpur]
power angle of 10 electrical degrees. If the Q.28 The initial accelerating power (in pu) will be
load is suddenly removed, assuming the
(A) 1.0 (B) 0.6
acceleration is constant for 10 cycle, the
value of the power angle after 5 cycles is (C) 0.56 (D) 0.4
________ electrical degrees. Q.29 If the initial accelerating power is X pu, the
[GATE EE 2017- Roorkee] initial acceleration in elect deg/ sec2 , and
Q.26 A 50 Hz generating unit has H-constant of 2 the inertia constant in MJ-sec/elect deg
MJ/MVA. The machine is initially operating respectively will be
in steady state at synchronous speed, and (A) 31.4 X , 18 (B) 1800 X , 0.056
producing 1 pu of real power. The initial
(C) X /1800, 0.056 (D) X / 31.4, 18
value of the rotor angle δ is 50 , when a
bolted three phase to ground short circuit Q.30 A 50 Hz, 4 pole, 500 MVA, 22 kV turbo
fault occurs at the terminal of the generator. generator is delivering rated megavolt-
Assuming the input mechanical power to amperes at 0.8 power factor. Suddenly a
remain at 1 pu, the value of δ in degrees, fault occurs reducing its electric power
0.02 second after the fault is ________. output by 40%. Neglect losses and assume
[GATE EE 2015-Kanpur] constant power input to the shaft. The
accelerating torque in the generator in MNm
Q.27 The angle δ in the swing equation of a
at the time of the fault will be
synchronous generator is the
[GATE EE 2013-Bombay] [GATE EE 2004-Delhi]
(A) angle between stator voltage and (A) 1.528 (B) 1.018
current (C) 0.848 (D) 0.509
(B) angular displacement of the rotor with Q.31 A variable speed drive rated for 1500 rpm,
respect to the stator 40 Nm is reversing under no load. Figure
(C) angular displacement of the stator mmf shows the reversing torque and the speed
with respect to a synchronously rotating during the transient. The moment of inertia
axis of the drive is [GATE EE 2004-Delhi]
(D) angular displacement of an axis fixed to
the rotor with respect to a
synchronously rotating axis
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 102 GATE ACADEMY®
Speed (A) 0.0685 rad (B) 0.0785 rad
+500 rpm
(C) 0.0885 rad (D) 0.0985 rad
t Q.35 A 500 MVA, 22 kV, 60 Hz four-pole turbo-
generator has an inertia constant of H = 7.5
MJ/MVA. If the mechanical power input is
–1500 rpm
552 MW and the electrical power output is
Torque
400 MW and stator copper loss is assumed
to be negligible, then the angular
+20 Nm
acceleration is _____ mech degree/sec 2 .
Q.36 The rotor of an alternator is subjected to an
t acceleration of 15 elect rad/ sec 2 . If the
0.5 sec acceleration exists constantly, the speed is
_____ rpm at the end of 5 cycles. Frequency
(A) 0.048 kg-m 2 (B) 0.064 kg-m 2 = 50 Hz and poles = 2. Initially the machine
(C) 0.096 kg-m 2 (D) 0.128 kg-m 2 is running at normal speed without any
Q.32 A 50 Hz synchronous generator, having a acceleration.
reactance of 0.15 pu, is connected to an .Common Data For Questions 37 & 38.
infinite bus through two identical parallel A 200 MVA, 11 kV, 50 Hz, 4 pole
transmission lines having reactance of 0.3 synchronous machine has an inertia constant
pu each. In steady state, generator is of 6 MJ/MVA.
delivering 1 pu power to the infinite bus. For
Q.37 The machine is operating at a load of 120
a three phase fault at the receiving end of
MW. When the load suddenly increases to
one line, calculate the rotor angle at the end
160 MW, the rotor retardation in elect
of first time step of 0.05 sec. Assume the
degree/ sec 2 is :
voltage behind transient reactance for the
generator as 1.1 pu, infinite bus voltage as 1 (A) 100 (B) 200
pu and inertia constant 1 MJ/MVA. (C) 300 (D) 400
[GATE EE 2000-Kharagpur] Q.38 The retardation calculated above is
Q.33 Inertia constant of a 100 MVA, 50 Hz, 4 maintained for 5 cycles. Find the change in
pole generator is, 10 MJ/MVA. If the rotor angle in mech rad/sec and rotor speed
mechanical input to the machine is suddenly in rpm respectively at the end of this period.
raised from 50 MW to 75 MW, the rotor (A) 0.2618, 1497.5 (B) 0.5236, 1497.5
acceleration will be equal to [ESE 1999]
(C) 0.2618, 1502.5 (D) 0.5236, 1502.5
(A) 225 electrical degree/ s 2
Q.39 A synchronous machine is connected to an
(B) 22.5 electrical degree/ s 2 infinite bus through a transformer and a
(C) 125 electrical degree/ s 2 double circuit transmission line. The infinite
(D) 12.5 electrical degree/ s 2 bus voltage V = 1 pu. The direct axis
Q.34 The K.E. stored in the rotor of a 20 MVA, 4 transient reactance of the machine is 0.20
pole, 50 Hz alternator is 60 MJ. The input to pu, the transformer reactance is 0.10 pu, and
the machine is 15 MW at a developed power the reactance of each of the transmission
of 13.5 MW. Determine the value of δ at the line is 0.40 pu, all to a base of the rating of
end of 10 cycles. the synchronous machine. Initially the
machine is delivering 0.8 pu power with a
GATE ACADEMY® 103 Power System Stability
terminal voltage of 1.05 pu. The inertia (A) 2 MJ/MVA (B) 4 MJ/MVA
constant H = 5 MJ/MVA at 60 Hz. All (C) 8 MJ/MVA (D) 16 MJ/MVA
resistances are neglected. The equation of Q.44 Two 50 Hz generating units operate in
the motion of the machine rotor in parallel within the same power plant and
elec rad/sec2 is : have the following ratings : [ESE 2001]
Unit 1 : 500 MVA, 0.85 power factor, 20
(A) 2160 [ 0.8 − 2.222sin δ]
kV, 3000 rpm, H1 = 5 MJ / MVA
(B) 2160 [ 0.8 − 1.111sin δ]
Unit 2 : 200 MVA, 0.9 power factor, 20 kV,
(C) 37.7 [ 0.8 − 2.222sin δ] 1500 rpm, H2 = 5 MJ / MVA
(D) 37.7 [ 0.8 − 1.111sin δ] The equivalent inertia constant H in MJ /
MVA on 100 MVA base is
Q.40 An electric motor, developing a starting
(A) 2.5 (B) 5.0
torque of 15 Nm, starts with a load torque of
(C) 10.0 (D) 35.0
7 Nm on its shaft. If the acceleration at start
Q.45 With a number of generator of MVA
is 2 rad/ sec2 , the moment of inertia of the
capacities S1 , S2 , S3 .....Sn and inertia
systems must be
constants H1 , H 2 .....H n respectively
(A) 0.25 kg-m 2 (B) 0.25 Nm 2
connected to the same bus bar in a station,
(C) 4 kg-m 2 (D) 4 Nm 2
the inertia constant of the equivalent
Practice (Objective & Num Ans) Questions : machine on a base of Sb is given by
Q.41 A power station consists of two synchronous [ESE 1998]
generators A and B of ratings 250 MVA and n n
Sb
500 MVA with inertia 1.6 pu and 1 pu, (A)  H i Si
i =1
(B) S
i =1
.H i
respectively on their own base MVA ratings. i

The equivalent per unit inertia constant for

n
Si n
Sb 1
the system on 100 MVA common base is
(C) S
i =1
. Hi (D) S
i =1
.
Hi
b i

[GATE EE 1998-Delhi] Q.46 A 500 MVA synchronous machine has

(A) 2.6 (B) 0.615 H1 = 4.6 MJ/MVA and a 1500 MVA
(C) 1.625 (D) 9.0 machine has H 2 = 3 MJ/MVA . The two
Q.42 In a system there are two generators
machines operate in parallel in a power
operating in parallel. One generator, of
station. Find the total kinetic energy of the
rating 250 MVA, has an inertia constant of 6
two machines.
MJ/MVA while the other generator of 150
(A) 2300 MJ (B) 3400 MJ
MVA has an inertia constant of 4 MJ/MVA.
(C) 4500 MJ (D) 6800 MJ
The inertia constant for the combined
system on 100 MVA common base, is Q.47 Power station 1 has four identical generator
_____ [GATE EE 1994-Kharagpur] sets each rated 80 MVA and each having an
inertia constant 7 MJ/MVA, while power
Q.43 Two identical synchronous machines having
station 2 has three sets each rated 200 MVA,
same inertia constant are connected in
3 MJ/MVA. The stations are located close
parallel and swinging together. The effective
together to be regarded as a single
inertia constant is 4 MJ/MVA. Then each
equivalent machine for stability studies.
machine has an inertia constant of
Calculate the inertia constant of the
[ESE 2013]
equivalent machine on 100 MVA base.
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 104 GATE ACADEMY®
(A) 11.6 MJ/MVA (B) 24.3 MJ/MVA Q.51 During a disturbance on a synchronous
(C) 35.7 MJ/MVA (D) 40.4 MJ/MVA machine, the rotor swings from A to B
Q.48 A generator having H = 6 MJ/MVA is before finally settling down to a steady state
connected to a synchronous motor having at point C on the power angle curve. The
H = 4 MJ/MVA through a network of speed of the machine during oscillation is
reactances. The generator is delivering synchronous at point (s)
power of 1 pu to the motor when a fault [GATE EE 1996-Bangalore]
occurs which reduces the delivered power. (A) A and B (B) A and C
At the time when the reduced power (C) B and C (D) only at C
delivered is 0.6 pu, determine the angular
Q.52 The given figure shows electric power input
acceleration of the generator wrt the motor if
the frequency is 60 Hz. Pe to a lossless synchronous motor as a
(A) 1200 e0 / sec2 (B) 1500 e0 / sec2 function of torque angle δ . The load is
suddenly increased from P0 to Ps and the
(C) 1800 e0 / sec2 (D) 2100 e0 / sec2
Q.49 Two synchronous generators represented by motor oscillates around δ s between δ 0 and
a constant voltage behind transient reactance δ m . List-I given below shows the different
are connected by a pure reactance positions in the oscillating cycle and List-II
X = 0.3 pu . The generator inertia constants gives the relationship between the motor
are H1 = 4 MJ/MVA and H 2 = 6 MJ/MVA , speed ω and the synchronous speed ωs .
and the transient reactances are Match List-I with List-II and select the
X 1 ' = 0.16 pu and X 2 ' = 0.2 pu . The correct answer using the codes given below
system is operating in the steady state with the Lists : [ESE 1993]
E1 ' = 1.2 pu , Pm1 = 1.5 pu and E2 ' = 1.1 pu , Pe
3
Pm 2 = 1.0 pu . Denote the relative power
2
Ps
angle between the two machines by
δ = δ1 − δ2 and obtain the equivalent swing P0 1

equation in terms of δ at 60 Hz.

d 2δ d
(A) = 3000 [1 − 2sin δ] d0 ds dm p
dt 2
List-I (Position in oscillating cycle)
d 2δ
(B) = 4500 [ 0.5 − 4sin δ] A. At point 1
dt 2
B. At point 2 while oscillating from 1
d 2δ
(C) = 3000 [1.5 − 2sin δ] towards 3
dt 2
C. At point 3
d 2δ
(D) = 4500 [ 0.5 − 2sin δ] D. At point 2 while oscillating from 3
dt 2
towards 1
Q.50 A synchronous motor is receiving 50% of
the power it is capable to receive from an List-II (Relation between ω and ω s )
infinite bus. If the load on the motor is 1. ω = ωs and ω is increasing
suddenly reduced to 80% of the previous
2. ω > ωs and ω is maximum
value, swing of the motor around its new
equilibrium position. 3. ω < ωs and ω is minimum
[GATE EE 1997-Madras]
4. ω = ωs and ω is decreasing
GATE ACADEMY® 105 Power System Stability
Codes : A B C D Pe
(A) 3 4 1 2 Pmax
(B) 4 3 1 2 Power A2
(C) 3 4 2 1 Pm
(D) 4 3 2 1 A1
Q.53 A cylindrical rotor generator delivers 0.5 pu
d
power in the steady-state to an infinite bus d0 dc dm
through a transmission line of reactance 0.5 Power angle

pu. The generator no-load voltage is 1.5 pu (A) Three phase fault with instantaneous
and the infinite bus voltage is 1 pu. The clearing
inertia constant of the generator is 5 MW- (B) Three phase fault with subsequent
s/MVA and the generator reactance is 1 pu. clearing
The critical clearing angle, in degrees, for a
three-phase dead short circuit fault at the (C) Single line to ground fault with
generator terminal is instantaneous clearing
[GATE EE 2012-Delhi] (D) Single line to ground fault with
(A) 53.5 (B) 60.2 subsequent clearing
(C) 70.8 (D) 79.6 Q.56 For a fault in a power system, the term critical
Q.54 A generator delivers power of 1.0 p.u. to an clearing time is related to [ESE 2012]
infinite bus through a purely reactive (A) Reactive power limit
network. The maximum power that could be
(B) Transient stability limit
delivered by the generator is 2.0 p.u. A three
phase fault occurs at the terminals of the (C) Short-circuit current limit
generator which reduces the generator (D) Steady state stability limit
output to zero. The fault is cleared after tc
Q.57 The synchronous generator shown in the
second. The original network is then figure is supplying active power to an
restored. The maximum swing of the rotor infinite bus via two short, lossless
angle is found to be δ max = 110 electrical transmission lines, and is initially in steady
degree. Then the rotor angle in electrical state. The mechanical power input to the
degrees at t = tc is generator and the voltage magnitude E are
[GATE EE 2003-Madras] constant. If one line is tripped at time t1 by
(A) 55 (B) 70 opening the circuit breakers at the two ends
(C) 69.14 (D) 72.4 (although there is no fault), then it is seen
that the generator undergoes a stable
Q.55 Figure 2 given below is the ‘equal area’
transient. Which one of the following
criterion diagram for the determination of
waveforms of the rotor angle δ shows the
transient stability limit of the power system
transient correctly?
shown in figure 1 for a fault on the
transmission line. [GATE EE 2015-Kanpur]
What is the type of fault, and the time of its Line 1
Synchronous generator
clearing, from figure 2? [ESE 2007] Infinite Bus
Generator Infinite bus XS 1Ð0
Fault EÐd
Line 2
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 106 GATE ACADEMY®
d line reactance, X, such that the system does
(A) not lose synchronism subsequent to this
tripping is [GATE EE 2007-Kanpur]
1.0Ð00
X
X ' = 0.1 pu
X
d=0 1.0Ðd
t1 time
d(t )
d One line trips
(B) 1300

(A) 0.87 (B) 0.74

d=0 t1 time
(C) 0.67 (D) 0.54
Q.59 A synchronous generator is feeding 250
MW to a large 50 Hz network over a double
d
(C) circuit transmission line. The maximum
d=0
t1 steady state power that can be transmitted
time over the line with both circuits in operation
is 500 MW and is 350 MW with any one of
the circuits. A solid three phase fault
occurring at the network end of one of the
lines causes it to trip. Estimate the critical
clearing angle and critical clearing time in
which the circuit breakers must trip so that
d
(D) synchronism is not lost.
(A) 580 , 0.056 M sec
t1
d=0
time (B) 530 , 0.056 M sec
(C) 580 , 0.056 M sec
(D) 530 , 0.056 M sec
Q.60 The single line diagram of a balanced power
Q.58 Consider a synchronous generator connected system is shown in the figure. The voltage
magnitude at the generator internal bus is
to an infinite bus by two identical parallel
constant and 1.0 p.u. The p.u. reactances of
transmission lines. The transient reactance
different components in the system are also
X ' of the generator is 0.1 pu and the
shown in the figure. The infinite bus voltage
mechanical power input to it is constant at
magnitude is 1.0 p.u. A three phase fault
1.0 pu. Due to some previous disturbance, occurs at the middle of line 2.
the rotor angle (δ) is undergoing an The ratio of the maximum real power that
undamped oscillation with the maximum can be transferred during the pre-fault
value of δ(t ) equal to 1300 . One of the condition to the maximum real power that
parallel lines trips due to relay mal-operation can be transferred under the faulted
condition is _________.
at an instant when δ(t ) = 1300 as shown in
[GATE EE 2016-Bangalore]
the figure. The maximum value of per unit
GATE ACADEMY® 107 Power System Stability
Generator internal bus
j0.1
Infinite bus Q.63 The load carrying capability of a long AC
j0.5 transmission line is
Line 1
j0.2 [GATE EE 1999-bombay]
(A) always limited by the conductor size
j0.5
Line 2 (B) limited by stability considerations
j0.1 (C) reduced at low ambient temperatures
Q.61 A synchronous generator is connected to an (D) decreased by the use of bundled
infinite bus through a lossless double circuit conductors of single conductors.
transmission line. The generator is
Q.64 The use of high-speed circuit-breakers
delivering 1.0 pu power at a load angle of
[GATE EE 1997-Madras, ESE 2014]
300 when a sudden fault reduces the peak
(A) reduces the short circuit current
power that can be transmitted to 0.5 pu.
(B) improves system stability
After clearance of fault, the peak power that
can be transmitted becomes 1.5 pu. Find the (C) decreases system stability
critical clearing angle. (D) increases the short circuit current
[GATE EE 2001-Kanpur] Q.65 The transient stability of the power system
Q.62 A generator is supplying 1 per unit power to can be effectively improved by
an infinite bus through the system shown in [GATE EE 1993-Bombay]
figure. Following fault at F, circuit breakers (A) excitation control
B3 and B4 open simultaneously. The P-δ (B) phase shifting transformer
relationships in per unit are given by (C) single pole switching of circuit breakers
j1 j1 (D) increasing the turbine valve opening
B1 B2
- j1 Bus Q.66 A transmission line has a total series
reactance of 0.2 pu. Reactive power
j1 - j1 j1 compensation is applied at the midpoint of
F
B3 B4 the line and it is controlled such that the
midpoint voltage of the transmission line is
Pre-fault condition : P = 2sin δ always maintained at 0.98 pu. If voltages at
During fault condition : both ends of the line are maintained at 1.0
When B3 , B4 remain closed : P = 0.2sin δ pu, then the steady state power transfer limit
of the transmission line is
After B3 , B4 open : P = 1.5sin δ
[GATE EE 2002-Bangalore]
The critical angle δ , before which breakers (A) 9.8 pu (B) 4.9 pu
B3 and B4 must open so that synchronism (C) 19.6 pu (D) 5 pu
is not lost is [GATE EE 1991-Madras] Q.67 Consider the model shown of a transmission
1(δmax − δ0 ) − 1.5cos δmax + 0.2cos δ0  line with a series capacitor at its mid point.
(A) δcr = cos−1  
 1.3  The maximum voltage on the line is at the
1(δ − δ ) + 2cos δmax − 0.2cos δ0  location. [GATE EE 2001-Kanpur]
(B) δcr = cos−1  max 0 
 1.3
1(δ − δ ) + 1.5cos δmax − 0.2cos δ0 
(C) δcr = cos−1  max 0 
 1.3
1(δ − δ ) + 2cos δmax − 1.5cos δ0 
(D) δcr = cos−1  max 0 
 1.3
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 108 GATE ACADEMY®
(A) P1 (B) P2 such that the mid-point voltage is held at
0.96 pu when the voltage at both ends are 1
(C) P3 (D) P4
pu. What is the steady state power
Q.68 A transmission line has equal voltages at the transmission limit of such a system?
two ends, maintained constant by two [ESE 2009]
sources. A third source is to be provided to (A) 4.8 pu (B) 0.0 pu
maintain constant voltage (equal to end
(C) 2.4 pu (D) 9.6 pu
voltages) at either the midpoint of the line or
at 75% of the distance from the sending end. Q.72 The transient stability limit of a power
Then the maximum power transfer system can be appreciably increased by
capabilities of the line in the original case introducing [ESE 1994]
and the other two cases respectively will be (A) Series inductance (B) Shunt inductance
in the following ratios. (C) Series capacitance (D) Shunt capacitance
[GATE EE 2000-Kharagpur] Q.73 Shunt compensation in an EHV line is used
(A) 1 : 1 : 1 (B) 1 : 2 : 1/0.75 to [ESE 1994]
(C) 1 : 2 : 4 (D) 1 : 4 : 16 (A) Improve stability
Q.69 Reactive power compensation is applied at (B) Reduce fault level
midpoint of an EHV line of total reactance (C) Improve the voltage profile
0.2 pu so as to maintain the voltage there at (D) Substitute for synchronous phase
0.98 pu. The voltage at both ends of the line modifier
is 1∠00 pu. The steady state power transfer Q.74 Calculate the level of series compensation
limit, in pu, is [ESE 2012] X C that will maximize the received power
(A) 2.45 (B) 5 in a single machine system shown in figure.
(C) 9.8 (D) 19.6 All the values are in p.u. The generator
Q.70 In a transmission line, the mid-point voltage reactance is j0.2 pu.
is maintained to V by a compensating device E = 1Ðd V = 1Ð0o
as shown in the circuit below. What is the X S = j 0.2 j2 - jX C
I 0.1 PR
real power flow through the line?
[ESE 2009]
Generator Infinite bus
V Ðd jX / 2 jX / 2 V Ð0
Vm Q.75 In a two bus ac system, the sending end
| Vm | = V voltage VS and the receiving end voltage
VR for the line is 1 pu. The line reactance is
j 0.05 and resistance is neglected. If the real
V2 δ 2V 2 power flow through the line is 10 pu, then
(A) sin (B) sin δ
X 2 X the reactive power flow through the line is
V2 2V 2 δ _______ pu.
(C) sin δ (D) sin
X X 2
Q.71 A short transmission line having zero
resistance and total series reactance of 0.4
pu is provided with reactive power
compensation at the mid-point of the line
GATE ACADEMY® 109 Power System Stability

Answer Keys

Objective & Numerical Answer Type Questions

1. D 2. C 3. D 4. C 5. D
6. A 7. A 8. D 9. D 10. C
11. A 12. 0.0186 13. B 14. A 15. D
16. * 17. * 18. A 19. D 20. B
12.5 to
21. B 22. C 23. D 24. A 25.
12.9
26. 5.9 27. D 28. C 29. B 30. B
31. A 32. 27 33. A 34. B 35. 218.9
36. 3014.32 37. C 38. A 39. C 40. C
Practice (Objective & Numerical Answer) Questions
41. D 42. 21 43. A 44. D 45. C
46. D 47. D 48. C 49. D 50. 17.2
51. A 52. B 53. D 54. C 55. B
56. B 57. A 58. C 59. D 60. 2.2857
61. 70.3 62. C 63. B 64. B 65. C
66. A 67. C 68. B 69. B 70. D
71. A 72. C 73. C 74. 2.027 75. 5.36

16. (1) 1.075 pu (2) 1.79 pu (3) 1.26 pu (4) 0.69 pu

17. (1) 0.8 pu (2) 0.57 pu (3) 1.33 pu (4) 1.33 pu
(5) 0.37 pu


 15 Power System Protection

Objective & Numerical Ans Type Questions : (A) 25 A (B) 15 A

Q.1 In a 4 bus system the circuit breakers and (C) 50 A (D) 10 A
the various zones of protection are shown in Q.4 The neutral of 10 MVA, 11 kV alternator is
figure. If the circuit breakers E, F and G trip, earthed through a resistance of 5 ohms. The
the location of the fault is on bus______. earth fault relay is set to operate at 0.75 A.
[GATE 1991, IIT Madras] The CT's have a ratio of 1000/5. What
percentage of the alternator winding is
A 1 3 protected? [GATE 1998, IIT Delhi]
2
I (A) 85% (B) 88.2%
B D E
G H (C) 15% (D) 11.8%
F J
C
Q.5 The plug setting of a negative sequence
K
4
relay is 0.2 A. The current transformer ratio
is 5 : 1. The minimum value of line to line
L fault current for the operation of the relay is
[GATE 2000, IIT Kharagpur]
Q.2 The distribution system shown in figure is to
1
be protected by over current system of (A) 1 A (B) A
protection. For proper fault discrimination 0.732
directional over current relays will be 0.2
(C) 1.732 A (D) A
required at locations 0.732
[GATE 1993, IIT Bombay] Q.6 A two machine power system in shown
33 kV 1 2 3 4 33 kV below. Transmission line XY has positive
Supply Supply sequence impedance of Z1 Ω and zero
sequence impedance of Z 0 Ω.
5 Load
X Y
(A) 1 and 4 (B) 2 and 3
(C) 1, 4 and 5 (D) 2, 3 and 5 F
Q.3 If the fault current is 2000 A, the relay
A phase to ground fault with zero fault
setting is 50% and C.T. ratio is 400 : 5, the
impedance occurs at the center of the
plug setting multiplier will be
transmission line. Bus voltage at X and line
[GATE 1996, IISc Bangalore]
GATE ACADEMY® 111 Power System Protection
current from X to F for the phase 'a', are breaker terminal is 0.05 μF . The critical
given by Va Volts and I a Amperes, value of resistance in ohms required to be
respectively. Then, the impedance measured connected across the circuit breaker contacts
by the ground distance relay located at the which will give no transient oscillation is
terminal X of line XY will be given by _______. [GATE 2019, IIT Madras]
[GATE 2008, IISc Bangalore] Practice (Objective & Num Ans) Questions :
Z Z
(A) 1 Ω (B) 0 Ω Q.1 A Buchholz relay is used for
2 2
(A) protection of a transformer against all
Z 0 + Z1 Va
(C) Ω (D) Ω internal faults.
2 Ia
(B) protection of a transformer against
Q.7 A three-phase, 33 kV oil circuit breaker is external faults.
rated 1200 A, 2000 MVA, 3s. The (C) protection of a transformer against both
symmetrical breaking current is internal and external faults.
[GATE 2010, IIT Guwahati] (D) protection of induction motors.
(A) 1200 A (B) 3600 A Q.2 Match the following :
(C) 35 kA (D) 104.8 kA Equipment Function
Q.8 Consider a stator winding of an alternator
A. Circuit breaker P. Voltage control
with an internal high-resistance ground fault. B. Lighting arrester Q. Power control
The currents under the fault condition are as C. Governor R. Over-voltage
shown in the figure. The winding is D. Exciter protection
S. Over-current
protected using a differential current scheme protection
with current transformers of ratio 400/5 as
shown. The current through the operating (A) A-S, B-R, C-Q, D-P
coil is [GATE 2010, IIT Guwahati] (B) A-S, B-Q, C-R, D-P
CT ratio 400/5 CT ratio 400/5 (C) A-R, B-S, C-Q, D-P
(220 + j0) A (250 + j0) A (D) A-S, B-R, C-P, D-Q
Q.3 The distance relay with inherent directional
property is known as ______ relay.
Q.4 The inductance and capacitance of a power
Operating coil system network up to a circuit breaker
(A) 0.1875 A (B) 0.2 A location are 1 H and 0.01μF respectively,
(C) 0.375 A (D) 60 kA the value of the shunt resistor across the
Q.9 The total impedance of the secondary circuit breaker, required for critical damping
winding, leads and burden of a 5 A CT is of the restriking voltage is ______ kΩ.
0.01Ω . If the fault current is 20 times the Q.5 Type of relay most suited for
rated primary current of the CT, the VA List-I
output of the CT is _______. (a) Buchholz relay
[GATE 2019, IIT Madras] (b) Translay relay
Q.10 In a 132 kV system, the series inductance up (c) Carrier current, phase comparison relay
to the point of circuit breaker location is 50 (d) Directional over current relay
mH. The shunt capacitance at the circuit (e) Negative sequence relay
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 112 GATE ACADEMY®
List-II (C) CB5 must be set to trip after CB2 trips.
(P) Feeder (D) CB5 must be set to trip before CB1,
(Q) Transformer CB2, CB3 and CB4 trip.
(R) Radial distributed Q.11 In an inverse definite minimum time,
electromagnetic type over-current relay, the
(S) Generator
minimum time feature is achieved because
(T) Ring main distributor
of
(U) Long overload transmission line
(A) saturation of the magnetic circuit.
application
(B) proper mechanical design.
(A) a-Q , b-P , c-U , d-T , e-S
(C) appropriate time delay element.
(B) a-S , b-T , c-U , d-P , e-Q (D) electromagnetic damping.
(C) a-Q , b-U , c-P , d-T , e-S Q.12 In a 3 step distance protection, the reach of
(D) a-P , b-Q , c-U , d-T , e-S the 3 zones of the relay at the beginning of
the first line typically extends upto
Q.6 Fringing in a capacitive type transducer can
(A) 100% of the first line, 50% of the
be minimized by providing a _____.
second line and 20% of the third line.
Q.7 Resistance switching is normally employed (B) 80% of the first line, 50% of the second
in line and 20% of the third line.
(A) All breakers (C) 80% of the first line, 20% of second
(B) Bulk oil breakers line and 10% the third line.
(C) Minimum oil breakers (D) 50% of first line, 50% of second line
(D) Air blast circuit breakers and 20% of the third line
Q.8 Reactance relay is normally preferred for Q.13 In the protection of transformers, harmonic
protection against restraint is used to guard against
(A) Earth faults (A) magnetizing inrush current.
(B) Phase faults (B) unbalanced operation.
(C) Open-circuit faults (C) lightning.
(D) None of these (D) switching over-voltages.
Q.14 Consider the problem of relay coordination
Q.9 The use of high speed circuit breakers
for the distance relays R1 and R2 on
(A) reduces the short circuit current.
adjacent lines of a transmission system
(B) improves system stability.
figure. The zone 1
(C) decreases system stability.
Zone 2 ( R2 )
(D) increases the short circuit current.
Zone1( R2 )
Q.10 Three sections of a feeder are provided with
circuit breakers CB1, CB2, CB3, CB4, CB5
and CB6. For a fault F as indicated in figure. R1 R2
F
Zone1( R1 )
Zone 2 ( R1 )
CB1 CB2 CB3 CB4 CB5 CB6
F and zone 2 settings for both the relays are
(A) CB5 must be set to trip after CB1 trips. indicated on the diagram. Which of the
(B) CB5 must be set to trip after CB3 and following indicates the correct time setting
CB4 trip. for the zone 2 of relays R1 and R2 .
GATE ACADEMY® 113 Power System Protection
(A) TZ 2 R1 = 0.6s, TZ 2 R2 = 0.3s (C) OHM relay
(B) TZ 2 R1 = 0.3s, TZ 2 R2 = 0.6s (D) Reactance relay
Q.18 Keeping in view the cost and overall
(C) TZ 2 R1 = 0.3s, TZ 2 R2 = 0.3s
effectiveness, the following circuit breaker
(D) TZ 2 R1 = 0.1s, TZ 2 R2 = 0.3s is best suited for capacitor bank switching
Q.15 The interrupting time of a circuit breaker is (A) Vacuum (B) Air blast
the period between the instant of (C) SF6 (D) Oil
(A) initiation of short circuit and the arc Q.19 In a biased differential relay the bias is
extinction on an opening operation defined as a ratio of
(B) energizing of the trip circuit and the arc (A) Number of turns of restraining and
extinction on an opening operation operating coil
(C) initiation of short circuit and the parting (B) Operating coil current and restraining
of primary arc contacts coil current
(D) energizing of the trip circuit and the (C) Fault current and operating coil current
parting of primary arc contacts. (D) Fault current and restraining coil
Q.16 A list of relays and the power system current
components protected by the relays are
Q.20 Consider the protection system shown in the
given in List-I and List-II respectively.
figure below. The circuit breakers numbered
Choose the correct match from the four
from 1 to 7 are of identical type. A single
choices given below :
line to ground fault with zero fault
List-I impedance occurs at the midpoint of the line
(i) Distance relay (at point F), but circuit breaker 4 fails to
(ii) Under frequency relay operate ("Stuck breaker"), if the relays are
(iii)Differential relay coordinated correctly, a valid sequence of
(iv) Buchholz relay circuit breaker operation is
List-II
1. Transformers 1 Transmission 3
line
2. Turbines
3. Bus bars 2 4 Struck breaker 6
4. Shunt capacitors Bus A
5. Alternators F
6. Transmission lines
5 Transmission 7
line
Codes : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
Bus B Bus C
(A) 6 5 3 1
(A) 1, 2, 6, 7, 3, 5 (B) 1, 2, 5, 5, 7, 3
(B) 4 3 2 1
(C) 5, 6, 7, 3, 1, 2 (D) 5, 1, 2, 3, 6, 7
(C) 5 2 1 6
Q.21 Voltage phasor at the two terminals of a
(D) 6 4 5 3
transmission line of length 70 km have a
Q.17 The transmission line distance protection
magnitude of 1.0 per unit but are 180
relay having the property of being inherently
degrees out of phase. Assuming that the
directional is
maximum load current in the line is 1/5th of
(A) Impedance relay minimum 3-phase fault current. Which one
(B) MHO relay of the following transmission line protection
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 114 GATE ACADEMY®
schemes will NOT pick up for this 0.14 × Time multiplier setting
top =
condition? (Plug setting multiplier)0.02 − 1
(A) Distance protection using mho relays The maximum and minimum fault currents
with zone-1 set to 80% of the at bus B are 2000 A and 500 A respectively.
impedance. Assuming the time multiplier setting and
(B) Directional overcurrent protection set to plug setting for relay RB to be 0.1 and 5 A
pick up at 1.25 times the maximum load respectively, the operating time of RB (in
current
seconds) is ______
(C) Pilot relaying system with directional
Q.25 A 3-phase transformer rated for 33 kV/11
comparison scheme
kV is connected in delta/star as shown in
(D) Pilot relaying system with segregated
figure. The current transformers (CTs) on
phase comparison scheme.
low and high voltage sides have a ratio of
Q.22 Match the items in List-I (Type of
500/5. Find the currents i1 and i2 , if the
transmission line) with the items in List-II
(Type of distance relay preferred) and select fault current is 300 A as shown in figure.
the correct answer using the codes given [Set - 02]
below the lists. a
List-I List-II b
A. Short Line 1. Ohm Relay c 300 A
B. Medium Line 2. Reactance i1 i2
Relay
C. Long Line 3. Mho Relay 1
(A) i1 = A, i2 = 0 A
Codes : A B C 3
(A) 2 1 3 (B) i1 = 0 A, i2 = 0 A
(B) 3 2 1 1
(C) i1 = 0 A, i2 = A
(C) 1 2 3 3
(D) 1 3 2 1 1
(D) i1 = A, i2 = A
Q.23 A negative sequence relay is commonly 3 3
used to protect Q.26 A power system with two generators is
(A) An alternator shown in figure below. The system
(B) A transformer (generators, buses and transmission lines) is
(C) A transmission line protected by six overcurrent relays R1 to R6
(D) A bus bar . Assuming a mix of directional and non-
Q.24 The over current relays for the line directional relays at appropriate locations,
protection and loads connected at the buses the remote backup relays for R4 are
are shown in the figure.
R1 R2
A B C S1 R5 R6 S2
R3 R4
RA RB

300 A 200 A 100 A (A) R1 , R2 (B) R2 , R6

The relays are IDMT in nature having the
(C) R2 , R5 (D) R1 , R6
characteristic
GATE ACADEMY® 115 Power System Protection

Answer Keys

Objective & Numerical Answer Type Questions

1. 2 2. B 3. D 4. B 5. C
6. D 7. C 8. C 9. 100 10. 500
Practice (Objective & Numerical Answer) Questions
Mho
1. A 2. A 3. 4. 5 5. A
relay
Guard
6. 7. D 8. A 9. B 10. D
ring
11. A 12. B 13. A 14. A 15. B
16. A 17. B 18. A 19. B 20. C
21. A 22. A 23. A 24. 0.227 25. A
26. D


Power System Analysis [Workbook] 116 GATE ACADEMY®

Space for Rough Work

 16 Corona

Objective & Numerical Ans Type Questions : (C) Sharp points are provided in the line
hardware
Q.1 Only advantage of corona is that it
(A) Produces a pleasing luminous glow (D) Current density in conductor is reduced

(B) Makes line current sinusoidal Q.6 Corona occurs between two transmission
conductors when they
(C) Works as a safety valve for surges
(D) Ozone gas is produced (A) Have high potential difference

Q.2 The chances of occurrence of corona are (B) Are closely spaced
maximum during (C) Carry DC power
(A) Humid weather (D) Both (A) and (B)
(B) Dry weather Q.7 In humid weathers, corona occurs at a
(C) Winter voltage
(D) Hot summer (A) Much less then that needed in fair
Q.3 The charging current in a transmission line weather
increases due to corona effect because (B) Much higher than that needed in fair
corona increases weather
(A) Line current (C) Equal to that needed in fair weather
(B) effective line voltage
(D) None off the above
(C) Power loss in lines
Q.8 Compared with a solid conductor of the
(D) Effective conductor diameter same radius, corona appears on a stranded
Q.4 The effect of corona is conductor at a lower voltage, because
(A) Increased energy loss stranding
(B) Increased reactance (A) Assists ionisation
(C) Increased inductance (B) Make the current flow spirally about the
(D) All of the above axis of the conductor
Q.5 Corona losses are minimised when (C) Produces oblique sections to a plane
(A) Conductor size is reduced perpendicular to a axis of the conductor
(B) Smooth conductor is used (D) Produces surfaces of smaller radius
Power System Analysis [Workbook] 118 GATE ACADEMY®
Q.9 The good effect of corona on overhead lines Q.10 Corona loss in a DC line
is to (A) Less than that in AC line operating at
(A) Increase the line carrying capacity due to same rms voltage
conducting ionised air envelop around (B) More than that in AC line at same rms
the conductor voltage
(B) Increase the power factor due to corona (C) Same as in AC linear equal rms voltage
loss (D) None of the above
(C) Reduce the radio interference from the
conductor
(D) Reduce the steepness of surge fronts

Answer Keys

Objective & Numerical Answer Type Questions

1. C 2. A 3. D 4. A 5. B
6. D 7. A 8. D 9. D 10. A

